ABB SACE Emax 2 Series Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions

DOC.
N° 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804
SACE Emax 2
Emax low voltage air circuit-breakers E2.2-E4.2-E6.2
Installation, operation and maintenance

instructions for the installer and the user
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 |

Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers................................4 Accessory modules.................................................... 34
1 - Contents................................................................ 4 Ekip Dip protection release.............................................. 35
Organization of this handbook......................................4
1 - Operator interface................................................ 35
Intended readership......................................................4
Instructions...................................................................4 Introduction................................................................ 35
Warnings......................................................................5 Components of the interface...................................... 35
Standards.....................................................................6 LED............................................................................. 36
Protections: thresholds............................................... 36
2 - Transport and checking on receipt......................... 7
Protections: times....................................................... 36
Introduction..................................................................7 Settings...................................................................... 36
Weight of the circuit-breakers with packaging..............7 iTest pushbutton......................................................... 37
Transport of the packaged circuit-breaker...................7 Test connector............................................................ 37
Identification of packaging............................................8
2 - Protections.......................................................... 38
Packaging checks.........................................................8
Damage and Discrepancy Report.................................8 L Protection................................................................ 38
Storage method............................................................9 Protection S................................................................ 39
Protection I................................................................. 40
3 - Unpacking and handling...................................... 10
Protection G............................................................... 41
Opening the packaging............................................... 10 Neutral and Frequency................................................ 42
Disposal of packing materials..................................... 11 Additional protections................................................. 43
Weight of circuit-breakers without packaging............. 12 Summary table of protections..................................... 44
Lift the fixed circuit breaker or the moving part of a
3 - Measurements..................................................... 45
withdrawable circuit-breaker....................................... 12
Introduction Measurements........................................ 45
4 - Description.......................................................... 13
Instantaneous currents............................................... 45
Description of circuit-breaker..................................... 13 Maximum and minimum currents................................ 45
Description of the circuit-breaker front panel.............. 14 Trips............................................................................ 45
Description of specifications plate.............................. 14 Contact wear.............................................................. 46
Manual operations for opening and closing the circuit- Number of operations................................................. 46
breaker....................................................................... 15
4 - Test...................................................................... 47
Mechanical status indicators...................................... 17
Circuit breaker racking-in/racking-out operations....... 18 Presentation Test........................................................ 47
Mechanical position indicators................................... 21 LED test...................................................................... 47
Battery test................................................................. 47
5 - Environmental conditions..................................... 22
Protection test............................................................ 47
Installation environment.............................................. 22 Opening command test.............................................. 48
Temperatures of the installation environment.............. 22
5 - List of alarms and signals.................................... 49
Particular weather conditions..................................... 22
Dusty environments.................................................... 22 LED view..................................................................... 49
Vibration..................................................................... 22 Summary table of LED signals.................................... 50
Altitude....................................................................... 23 6 - Additional Ekip Dip functions............................... 52
Electromagnetic compatibility..................................... 23 Maintenance............................................................... 52
Storage Environment.................................................. 23 Local Bus.................................................................... 52
6 - Installation........................................................... 24 Date and time............................................................. 52
Warnings and precautions before the installation........ 24 7 - Operating features............................................... 53
Mounting of the fixed circuit-breaker.......................... 24 Electrical characteristics............................................. 53
Mounting anti-racking locks........................................ 24
8 - Default parameters.............................................. 54
Mounting the fixed part of the withdrawable circuit-
breaker........................................................................ 25 Ekip DIP default parameters....................................... 54
Types of terminal........................................................ 25 Ekip Touch protection release.......................................... 55
Reversal of the position of the vertical/horizontal
terminals..................................................................... 26 1 - Layout of the interface......................................... 55
Connection to the power circuit.................................. 27 Functions of the interface........................................... 55
Dimensions................................................................. 28 Components of the interface...................................... 56
Phase separators........................................................ 28 Signallings.................................................................. 57
Positioning anchor plates........................................... 29 Structure of the pages................................................ 57
Earthing...................................................................... 29 Diagnosis bar.............................................................. 58
Main page................................................................... 59
Introduction to Ekip protection releases......................... 30 Start page................................................................... 59
1 - Presentation......................................................... 30 Navigation.................................................................. 59
Families and functionality........................................... 30 2 - Alarm List Page.................................................... 60
Protections................................................................. 31 Description................................................................. 60
Measurements............................................................ 32 Components of the page............................................ 60
Integrated functions: Self-diagnosis, Test and Power 3 - Histograms page.................................................. 61
Controller.................................................................... 33
1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 © 2013 ABB SACE Emax 2 | I

Description................................................................. 61 Protection S2............................................................ 103
Components of the page............................................ 61 D Protection.............................................................. 104
Possible operations.................................................... 62 Protection UV2......................................................... 105
4 - Measuring instruments page................................ 63 Protection OV2......................................................... 105
Protection UF2.......................................................... 106
Description................................................................. 63
Protection OF2......................................................... 107
Components of the pages.......................................... 63
Set A-B..................................................................... 108
Possible operations.................................................... 63
Harmonic Distortion.................................................. 108
5 - Measurements Page............................................ 64 Additional Hi functions.............................................. 109
Description................................................................. 64 Summary table of Hi-Touch protections.................... 110
Components of the pages.......................................... 64 12 - G Touch protections......................................... 111
Possible operations.................................................... 64
Presentation............................................................. 111
6 - Menu................................................................... 65 S(V) Protection.......................................................... 112
Introduction................................................................ 65 Protection RV............................................................ 113
Components of the page............................................ 65 Protection RQ........................................................... 113
Components of the menus.......................................... 66 Protection OQ........................................................... 114
Protections Menu....................................................... 67 Protection OP........................................................... 115
Advanced menus........................................................ 68 Protection UP........................................................... 115
Settings Menu............................................................ 69 Summary table for G Touch protections.................... 116
Test Menu................................................................... 71 13 - G Hi-Touch protections.................................... 117
Information menu........................................................ 71
Presentation............................................................. 117
Measurements Menu.................................................. 72
Protection ROCOF.................................................... 118
7 - Insertion of the password.................................... 78 S2(V) Protection........................................................ 119
Description................................................................. 78 Protection RQ2......................................................... 121
Components of the page............................................ 78 Summary table of G Hi-Touch protections................ 122
8 - Setting the parameters........................................ 80 14 - Touch measurements....................................... 123
Modifying a parameter................................................ 80 Presentation............................................................. 123
Programming the release............................................ 80 Instantaneous currents............................................. 123
Edit Parameters by option page.................................. 81 Trips.......................................................................... 124
Edit Parameters by value page................................... 82 Events....................................................................... 125
Programming Page..................................................... 83 Maximum and minimum currents.............................. 126
9 - Touch protections................................................ 84 Peak Factor.............................................................. 126
Contact wear............................................................ 127
Presentation............................................................... 84
Datalogger................................................................ 127
L Protection................................................................ 85
Operation counters................................................... 129
Protection S................................................................ 86
Summary table of base measurements..................... 129
Protection I................................................................. 87
Protection G............................................................... 88 15 - Measuring Measurements................................ 130
MCR Protection.......................................................... 89 Presentation............................................................. 130
IU Protection............................................................... 90 Instantaneous voltages............................................. 131
Hardware trip.............................................................. 90 Instantaneous powers............................................... 132
Harmonic distortion.................................................... 90 Trips.......................................................................... 132
Current thresholds...................................................... 91 Maximum and Minimum voltage............................... 133
Protection T................................................................ 92 Maximum and minimum power................................. 134
Neutral........................................................................ 92 Power factor............................................................. 135
Iinst............................................................................ 93 Energy meters........................................................... 135
Additional functions.................................................... 93 Runtime frequency.................................................... 135
Summary table of Basic protections........................... 94 Synchrocheck........................................................... 135
10 - Measuring Pro protections................................. 96 Summary table of Measuring measurements............ 136
Presentation............................................................... 96 16 - Hi-Touch measurements.................................. 137
Protection UV............................................................. 97 Presentation............................................................. 137
Protection OV............................................................. 97 Wave forms............................................................... 137
Protection VU............................................................. 98 Harmonics................................................................ 137
Protection UF............................................................. 98 Network Analyzer...................................................... 138
Protection OF............................................................. 99 17 - Test.................................................................. 141
Protection RP............................................................. 99
Test........................................................................... 141
Phase Sequence....................................................... 100
Cos φ........................................................................ 100 18 - Self-diagnosis.................................................. 144
Synchrocheck........................................................... 100 Alarms and signals................................................... 144
Summary table of Measuring Pro protections........... 101 Self-diagnosis........................................................... 144
11 - Hi-Touch protections........................................ 102 Protections and Measurements................................ 145
Programming errors.................................................. 146
Presentation............................................................. 102
19 - Operating features........................................... 147
II | © 2013 ABB SACE Emax 2 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804

Electrical characteristics........................................... 147 Signallings................................................................ 194
Functional specifications.......................................... 148 Termination resistor.................................................. 194
20 - Default parameters.......................................... 149 Connections............................................................. 195
Access from the display............................................ 196
Ekip TOUCH default parameters............................... 149
7 - Ekip Com Profibus modules............................... 197
21 - Ekip Power Controller...................................... 151
Description............................................................... 197
Characteristics.......................................................... 151
Compatibility and power supply............................... 197
Accessories..................................................................... 153 AUP auxiliary contacts.............................................. 197
Ekip RTC contact...................................................... 197
1 - Preliminary considerations................................. 153 Connections............................................................. 198
Introduction.............................................................. 153 Termination resistors................................................. 198
Accessory combination tables.................................. 153 Access from the display............................................ 199
Circuit-breaker dismantling operations..................... 155 Signallings................................................................ 200
2 - Wiring diagrams................................................. 156 8 - Ekip Com DeviceNet modules............................ 201
General wiring diagrams........................................... 156 Description............................................................... 201
Circuit-breaker terminal box..................................... 157 Compatibility and power supply............................... 201
AUP auxiliary contacts.............................................. 201
Electronic accessories.................................................... 162
Ekip RTC contact...................................................... 201
1 - Ekip Supply modules......................................... 162 Connections............................................................. 202
Description............................................................... 162 Termination resistor.................................................. 202
Compatibility............................................................ 162 Access from the display............................................ 203
Electrical characteristics........................................... 162 Signallings................................................................ 204
Connections............................................................. 163 9 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP modules....................... 205
Signallings................................................................ 163 Description............................................................... 205
2 - Ekip Measuring modules.................................... 164 Compatibility and power supply............................... 205
Description............................................................... 164 AUP auxiliary contacts.............................................. 205
Compatibility and power supply............................... 164 Ekip RTC contact...................................................... 206
Electrical characteristics........................................... 164 Connections............................................................. 206
Isolation transformer................................................. 165 Access from the display............................................ 207
Measurements.......................................................... 165 Configuration............................................................ 208
Connections............................................................. 166 Signallings................................................................ 209
Access from the display............................................ 167 10 - Ekip Com Profinet modules.............................. 210
3 - Ekip Synchrocheck module................................ 171 Compatibility and power supply............................... 210
Description............................................................... 171 AUP auxiliary contacts.............................................. 210
Compatibility and power supply............................... 171 Ekip RTC contact...................................................... 210
Electrical characteristics........................................... 172 Connections............................................................. 211
Isolation transformer................................................. 172 Access from the display............................................ 212
Measurements.......................................................... 172 Signallings................................................................ 212
Connections............................................................. 173 11 - Ekip Link module............................................. 213
Access from the display............................................ 174 Compatibility and power supply............................... 214
4 - Ekip Signalling 4K module................................. 178 AUP auxiliary contacts.............................................. 214
Description............................................................... 178 Ekip RTC contact...................................................... 214
Compatibility and power supply............................... 178 Connections............................................................. 215
Electrical characteristics........................................... 178 Access from the display............................................ 216
Connections............................................................. 179 Configuration............................................................ 217
Access from the display............................................ 180 Signallings................................................................ 218
Signallings................................................................ 184 12 - Ekip Com Actuator module.............................. 219
5 - Ekip Signalling 2K modules................................ 185 Description............................................................... 219
Description............................................................... 185 Connections............................................................. 219
Compatibility and power supply............................... 185 Compatibility............................................................ 219
Electrical characteristics........................................... 185 13 - Other accessories............................................ 220
Connections............................................................. 186 Rating Plug modules................................................. 220
Access from the display............................................ 187 Gext Toroid............................................................... 220
Signals and inputs/outputs....................................... 192 RC sensor................................................................. 220
6 - Ekip Com Modbus RS-485 modules.................. 193 Ekip Connect application.......................................... 221
Description............................................................... 193 Ekip Bluetooth module.............................................. 221
Compatibility and power supply............................... 193 Ekip T&P module...................................................... 222
AUP auxiliary contacts.............................................. 193 Ekip TT module......................................................... 222
Ekip RTC contact...................................................... 193 Ekip Signalling 10K modules..................................... 223
1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 © 2013 ABB SACE Emax 2 | III

Ekip Multimeter module............................................ 224 3 - Maintenance...................................................... 251
External neutral......................................................... 224 Safety standards....................................................... 251
Expert personnel...................................................... 251
Electrical accessories..................................................... 225
Circuit-breaker life.................................................... 252
1 - Electrical Control accessories............................ 225 Maintenance schedule.............................................. 252
YO-YC-YO2-YC2: Opening and closing coil............. 225 4 - First level maintenance...................................... 253
YU: under-voltage coil.............................................. 227 Preliminary operations.............................................. 253
YR: remote resetting coil.......................................... 228 Inspections and general cleaning.............................. 253
M: motor................................................................... 229 Circuit-breaker connections and connections between
2 - Electrical signalling accessories......................... 230 circuit-breaker and switchboard............................... 253
Aux 4Q: auxiliary open-closed contacts.................... 230 Disassembly operations............................................ 254
Aux 6Q: Additional open/closed auxiliary contacts... 231 Cleaning and lubrication of the operating
Aux 15Q: External additional open/closed auxiliary mechanism............................................................... 255
contacts.................................................................... 232 Inspection of electrical and mechanical accessories.255
AUP: auxiliary position contacts............................... 233 Inspection of the protection release.......................... 255
RTC: ready to close signalling contact...................... 234 Test with Ekip Connect............................................. 256
S51: release tripping signalling contact.................... 235 Final checks.............................................................. 256
S33 M/2: springs loaded signalling contact.............. 236 Interlock check......................................................... 256
5 - Second level maintenance................................. 257
Mechanical accessories................................................. 237
Preliminary operations.............................................. 257
1 - Mechanical Protection accessories.................... 237 Inspections and general cleaning.............................. 257
PBC: opening and closing push-button protection... 237 Circuit-breaker connections and connections between
IP54 protection......................................................... 237 circuit-breaker and switchboard............................... 258
2 - Mechanical safety accessories.......................... 238 Disassembly operations............................................ 259
Cleaning and lubrication of the operating
KLC: open position key lock..................................... 238
mechanism............................................................... 261
PLC: padlock............................................................ 238
Inspection of electrical and mechanical accessories.262
Anti-racking-in lock.................................................. 238
Check for wear on the contacts................................ 263
MOC: Operation counter........................................... 238
Inspection of the protection release.......................... 264
PLP: padlock in connected/test/disconnected
Test with Ekip Connect............................................. 264
positions................................................................... 239
Final checks.............................................................. 264
KLP: key lock for connected/test/disconnected
Interlock check......................................................... 264
positions................................................................... 239
KLP lock additional accessory.................................. 239 6 - Decommissioning and treatment at end of life... 265
SL: shutter lock........................................................ 240 Safety standards....................................................... 265
SLE: external shutter lock......................................... 240 Qualified personnel................................................... 265
DLC: Door opening lock with the circuit-breaker in End of life treatment for circuit-breaker materials..... 265
closed position......................................................... 240 Disposal of packing materials................................... 265
DLP: door opening lock with the circuit-breaker in
connected/test position............................................ 240
DLR: lock on racking-in/racking-out of the moving part
with the door open.................................................... 240
3 - Mechanical Interlocks........................................ 241
Mechanical interlock of type A - Two Circuit-
breakers.................................................................... 241
Mechanical interlock of type B - Three Circuit-
breakers.................................................................... 241
Mechanical interlock of type C - Three Circuit-
breakers.................................................................... 241
Mechanical interlock of type D - Three Circuit-
breakers.................................................................... 241
Putting into service and maintenance............................ 242

1 - Putting into service............................................ 242
Introduction.............................................................. 242
General checks......................................................... 242
Procedures for checking the accessories................. 243
Final check list.......................................................... 245
2 - Identification of alarms or failures...................... 246
Introduction.............................................................. 246
Faults, causes and remedies.................................... 247
Faults signalled on the display.................................. 250
IV | © 2013 ABB SACE Emax 2 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804

ABB | SACE Emax 2
3 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 |

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers
1 - Contents
Organization of this handbook This manual contains instructions on the operations to be performed on EMAX E2.2-
E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers throughout their life cycle, from reception to installation, and from
commissioning to subsequent maintenance during operation, with particular attention to the
environment at the end of the life cycle of the product.
Reception Installation Commissioning Maintenance Disposal
Figure 1
Intended readership This manual refers to two user profiles, as defined by standard IEC 60050:
• Expert person, in the electrical area (IEV 195-04-01): Person with sufficient training and
experience to allow him/her to perceive the risks and to avoid the hazards potentially
created by electricity.
• Instructed person, in the electrical area (IEV 195-04-02): person adequately informed or
supervised by electrotechnical personnel to allow them to perceive the risks and to avoid
the hazards potentially created by electricity.
NOTE: This manual specifically indicates what operations can be performed by people
trained in the field of electricity. All the remaining operations described in the handbook
must be performed by expert persons, in the electrical area. ABB declines all liability
for damage to persons or property caused by failure to comply with the instructions
in this document.
Instructions
HAZARD! RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! Unplug or disconnect any power supply,
to avoid any potential risk of shock during assembly, installation, maintenance
or removal of the circuit-breaker from the service.
WARNING! Some operations must be performed when the circuit-breaker is

energized. In this case it is necessary to comply with all safety regulations.
4 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 1 - Contents

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Warnings
HAZARD
ACCIDENTAL CONTACT WITH LIVE
POINTS CAN CAUSE SHOCK, BURNS AND
RESULT IN DEATH.
Do not try to use the product in any way, before

having read this instruction manual
Figure 2
The following warnings must be respected:

• READ THE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE TRYING TO INSTALL, OPERATE
OR REPAIR THE CIRCUIT BREAKER.
• Store these instructions along with other documents for instruction, maintenance and
installation, drawings and descriptive notes on the circuit-breaker.
• Keep these documents available during the installation, operation and maintenance of the
appliance. The use of these instructions facilitates proper maintenance.
• Install the circuit-breaker within the limits of the project described in the instruction manual
shipped with the unit. These circuit-breakers are designed to operate with values of voltage
and current within the limits of plate ratings. Do not install this equipment in systems
operating at nominal values exceeding these limits.
• Follow the safety procedures indicated by Your Company.
• Do not open any covers or doors, do not work on devices before removing power from
all circuits, and after making sure of that with a measuring instrument.
WARNING!
• detailed descriptions of standard procedures for installation, use, maintenance and

principles for safe operation are not included. It is important to note that this document
contains safety and precaution instructions, against certain methods (of installation, use and
maintenance) that could cause harm to personnel, damage devices, or make them unsafe.
• these warnings and alarms do not include all conceivable ways to make installation, use and
maintenance recommended by ABB or not, that may be made, or possible consequences
and complications of each conceivable way, nor shall ABB investigate all those ways.
• anyone using maintenance procedures or devices, recommended by ABB or not, must
check thoroughly that neither personal safety nor the safety devices are endangered by
mode of installation, use, maintenance or the instruments used. For more information,
questions or specific problems contact your nearest ABB representative.
• This manual is written for qualified personnel only and is not intended as a substitute for
a proper course, or experience about safety procedures for this device.
• the purchaser, installer or end user is responsible for ensuring that notices and safety signs
are posted and that all access points and switching devices are locked securely when the
switchgear is left unattended, even momentarily.
• all the information contained in this document reflects the latest product information
available at the time of printing. We reserve the right to edit the document at any time
and without notice

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Standards The circuit-breakers of the Emax 2 series and their accessories comply with the following
international standards:
• IEC 60947
• EN 60947
• CEI EN 60947
• IEC 61000
They comply with the following EC directives:

• "Low Voltage Directives" (LVD) no.. 2006/95/EC
• "Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive" (EMC) no. 2004/108/EC
The Emax 2 circuit-breakers also feature a range certified according to these standards:
• American - UL 1066
• Russian - GOST (Russia Certificate of Conformity)
• Chinese - China CCC (China Compulsory Certification)

ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 - Transport and checking on receipt
Introduction The Emax 2 circuit-breakers, on account of their weight, require special attention during
transport and handling.
They are distributed with following packages:
• single package for fixed circuit-breaker
• two packages for withdrawable circuit-breakers (one package for the fixed part and one
for the mobile part).
The following notes regard transport, handling and storage.
Weight of the circuit-breakers The following table specifies the weights of the circuit-breakers with packaging:
with packaging
Moving part of Fixed part of
Fixed
withdrawable device withdrawable device
III IV Fs III IV Fs III IV Fs
E2.2 46 58 53 60 41 49
E4.2 63 77 67 81 57 69
E6.2 118 134 151 129 143 159 96 109 123
NOTE:
• weights are indicated with reference to the basic circuit-breakers including

protection release and its sensors, without terminals and without accessories.
• the weights of the fixed part of withdrawable circuit-breakers refer to the version
with horizontal rear terminals.
Transport of the packaged Consult the table "Weight of the circuit-breakers with packaging" before proceeding with the
circuit-breaker transport.
WARNING! Improper lifting can result in death, serious injury to persons and
damage to the equipment. Never lift a circuit-breaker and / or a fixed part
above other people.
IMPORTANT: The trained personnel in charge of handling and lifting must use
appropriate safety equipment.
7 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 2 - Transport and checking on receipt
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Identification of packaging Examine the state of the packaging and check that:
• The data on the packaging plate match the data of the order.
• The box is intact and perfectly closed.
1
SACE EMAX E2.2 N 1600

VERSION WITH ASSEMBLED ACCESSORIES
FIXED YO 24V AC-DC

2
6
POL 4
TERMINALS
REAR HORIZONTAL TERMINALS
CODE 1SDA055987R1 3
80156446401183
A.B. 1130055880 004100 4
FB.NR. BB44005099 5
8 0 3 1 0 0 4 0 3 5
Designed by ABB SACE Division
Figure 3
Pos. Description
1 Short description of the circuit-breaker
2 Description of accessories
3 Commercial code
4 Confirmation number and location
5 Circuit-breaker serial number
6 Features of the circuit-breaker
Packaging checks Examine the state of the material received and verify that:
• The circuit-breaker or the fixed part are consistent with the order.
• The circuit-breaker or the fixed part are completely intact.
IMPORTANT:
• If the material is to be stored, check it beforehand. For opening the

packaging, follow the procedures outlined in the section "Unpacking and
handling - opening the packages" on page 10
• In the case of any inconsistencies, report them within five days of reception.
See the paragraph "Damage and Discrepancy Report" in this chapter.
Damage and Discrepancy If there is any damage to the packaging upon receipt and / or inconsistencies between order
Report and product identification label or product please contact ABB. Damage to the packaging
must be reported no later than seven days from receipt of the material.
NOTE: The notification must indicate the Packing List number.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Storage method Place the packaging (circuit-breakers and / or fixed parts) on a horizontal plane, not in contact
with the floor. If the circuit-breaker has been removed and reinserted in the package ensure,
prior to storage that:
• The circuit-breaker is in the open position and the springs are unloaded. See the chapter
"Description - circuit-breaker opening/closing operations" on page 15
• The circuit-breaker is protected and locked in its original packaging
WARNING! overlay up to three packages with circuit-breakers E2.2 and E4.2

and up to two packages with circuit-breakers E6.2. If the packaging has been
opened, you can stack the circuit-breakers on the condition that the package
is re-wrapped as original.
3 (E2.2 - E4.2)
OK! 2 (E6.2)
NO!
Figure 4 Figure 5
ABB | SACE Emax 2
3 - Unpacking and handling
Opening the packaging

NOTE: to unpack the circuit-breaker safely refer to the instruction sheet in the zipped
packaging pouch.
The following is the procedure for opening the packaging:

1. Cut the bands that wrap the packing box. See Figure 6 and Figure 7.
Figure 6 Figure 7
2. Open the upper part of the packing box. See Figure 8 and Figure 9.
Figure 8 Figure 9
Continued on the next page
10 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 3 - Unpacking and handling
Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2
3. Remove the upper containment protection from the packing box. See Figure 10.
4. Remove the packing box by lifting it upwards. See Figure 11.
Figure 10 Figure 11
5. Disassembly the screws (See Figure 12 Fixed circuit-breaker). Disassembly the screws
and the mounting brackets (See Figure 13 Moving part of withdrawable device and
Figure 14 Fixed part of withdrawable device).
Figure 13 Moving part of withdra- Figure 14 Fixed part of withdrawa-

Figure 12 Fixed circuit-breaker wable device ble device
Disposal of packing materials For disposal of the packaging materials see the chapter " 6 - Decommissioning and treatment
at end of life " on page 265.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Weight of circuit-breakers The following table specifies the weights of the circuit-breakers without packaging:
without packaging
Moving part of Fixed part of
Fixed
withdrawable device withdrawable device
III IV Fs III IV Fs III IV Fs
E2.2 41 53 48 55 36 44
E4.2 56 70 60 74 50 62
E6.2 109 125 140 120 134 148 87 100 112
NOTE:
• the weights indicated in the table refer to the basic circuit-breakers including relays
and its sensors, without terminals and without accessories.
• the weights of the withdrawable circuit-breakers refer to the weight of the fixed part
in a version with horizontal rear terminals.
Lift the fixed circuit breaker

WARNING! Improper lifting can result in death, serious injury to persons and
or the moving part of a
damage to the equipment. Never lift a circuit-breaker and / or a fixed part
withdrawable circuit-breaker
above other people.
IMPORTANT: The trained personnel in charge of handling and lifting must use
appropriate safety equipment.
To lift the circuit-breaker:

1. Raise the circuit-breaker from the base of the packaging with the aid of the lifting plates
supplied with the circuit-breaker. See Figure 15.
Figure 15 Figure 16
To raise the fixed part of the circuit-breaker

1. Raise the fixed part from the base of the packaging with the aid of the two hooks
supplied with the fixed part. See Figure 16.
IMPORTANT: keep the lifting plates for the circuit breaker, the lifting hooks
of the fixed part and the manual of the circuit-breaker until disposal.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
4 - Description
Description of circuit-breaker The Emax E2.2, E4.2 and E6.2 circuit-breakers consist of a steel structure in which the
operating mechanism, the poles and the auxiliary parts are located.
Each pole, isolated from the others, contains the breaking parts and the current transformer
in its phase.
The structure of the poles differs between selective circuit-breaker or limiter.
The circuit-breaker is available in two types:
• fixed version
• withdrawable
The circuit-breaker in fixed version (see Figure 17) has its own terminals for connection to the
power circuit.
The withdrawable circuit breaker consists of a mobile part (see Figure 18) and of a fixed part
(see Figure 19) for connection through its own terminals to the power circuit.
The coupling between the mobile part and the fixed part is via disconnection contacts mounted
on the fixed part.
Figure 17 Figure 18
Figure 19
13 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 4 - Description

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Description of the circuit- The following are the main components of the circuit-breaker:
breaker front panel
1 2 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Figure 20
Pos. Description
1 Lever for manually loading the closing springs
2 SACE Ekip protection release
3 Name and size of the circuit-breaker
4 Open-closed signalling device
5 Opening pushbutton
6 Release tripping mechanical signal
7 Closing pushbutton
8 Springs loaded-unloaded signalling device
9 Electrical specifications plate
Description of specifications 1 2 3 4
plate
12
11 5
10
9
8
7
Uimp 12Kv 13
Figure 21
Pos. Description
1 Type of circuit-breaker
2 Utilization category
3 Device type: Circuit-breaker or disconnector
4 Rated current
5 Rated operating frequency
6 Rated voltage of accessories
7 Admissible rated short-time current
8 Rated duty short-circuit breaking capacity
9 Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
10 Rated service voltage
11 Standards
12 Circuit-breaker serial number
13 Impulse voltage

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Manual operations for opening The following is the sequence of steps for closing and opening the circuit-breaker:
and closing the circuit-breaker
1. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open / closed indicator "O - OPEN"), and check
that the springs are unloaded (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING")
as indicated in Figure 22.
2. Loading the springs - Pull the lever [A] downwards several times until the springs loaded
signalling device [B] is “yellow - CHARGED SPRING” as indicated in Figure 23.
A
B
Figure 22 Figure 23
3. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open/closed signalling device “O - OPEN”),

and check that the springs are loaded (springs signalling device “yellow - CHARGED
SPRING”) as indicated in Figure 24.
4. Closing - Press the closing push-button “I - Push ON” as indicated in Figure 25.
Figure 24 Figure 25
5. Check that the circuit-breaker is closed (open/closed indicator "I - CLOSED"), and
check that the springs are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED
SPRING" as indicated in Figure 26.
6. Opening - Press the opening push-button “O - Push OFF” as indicated in Figure 27.
Figure 26 Figure 27

7. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open / closed indicator "O - OPEN"), and check
that the springs are unloaded (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING")
as indicated in Figure 28.
Figure 28

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Mechanical status indicators The following are the possible states in which you can find the circuit-breaker during its use:
1. Circuit-breaker open with springs discharged (see Figure 29).

2. Circuit-breaker open with springs loaded (see Figure 30).
3. Circuit-breaker closed with springs discharged (see Figure 31).
4. Circuit-breaker closed with springs charged and not ready to close (see Figure 32). This
state occurs when after closing (see step 4 - Manual operations for opening and closing
the circuit-breaker) the springs are reloaded manually or automatically by the gearmotor
(if provided).
5. Circuit-breaker open with springs charged and not ready to close (see Figure 33).This
state occurs in the following cases:
• The circuit-breaker is open due to tripping of protection releases and the Reset signal
has not been reset.To close the circuit-breaker press the TU Reset button on the front
of the circuit-breaker.
• The key lock or padlock is active in the open position.
• The undervoltage release is de-energized.
• The opening release is permanently on.
• The closing release is permanently on.
• The withdrawable circuit breaker is located, during the insertion / extraction, in an inter-
mediate position between connected and test.
• The button for enabling the insertion/extraction crank of withdrawable circuit-breaker
is pressed.
Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31
Figure 32 Figure 33

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Circuit breaker racking-in/ The following is the procedure for the insertion of the moving part in the fixed part:
racking-out operations
WARNING! Before proceeding, remove all equipment used during the work
and remove processing waste and materials used.
1. Position the lifting plates on the mobile part making sure that the tongue of the plates is
latched properly. See Figure 34.
1 2 3
Figure 34
2. Extract the guides of the fixed part using the appropriate levers. See Figure 35.
3. Position the moving part over the guides of the fixed part. Latch by inserting the hollow
part of the side in the latch of the guide of the fixed part See Figure 36.
1
2
Figure 35 Figure 36
4. Unlatch the tongue and remove lifting plates from the moving part. See Figure 37.
1 2 3
Figure 37

5. Make sure that signalling device indicates the DISCONNECT position. See Figure 38.
Figure 38
6. Grip the guide levers of the fixed part and push them until the moving part stops. See
Figure 39.
Figure 39
7. Extract the disconnection crank from its housing See Figure 40.
8. Press the lock push-button and insert the crank in the moving part. In this phase the
moving part is still in DISCONNECT position. See Figure 41.
Figure 40 Figure 41

9. Turn the crank clockwise until the pushbutton comes out and the indicator shows that
the circuit-breaker is in TEST position. See Figure 42.
Figure 42
10. Press the lock button and rotate the crank clockwise until the pushbutton comes out
and the indicator shows that the circuit-breaker is in CONNECT position. See Figure 43.
1
Figure 43
11. Extract the crank. See Figure 44.

12. Replace the crank in its housing See Figure 45.
Figure 44 Figure 45
To extract the moving part from the fixed part, perform the same steps indicated for insertion
in reverse order.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Mechanical position indicators The following are the possible positions where you can find the mobile part of a withdrawable
circuit-breaker during its use:
• circuit breaker in racked-out position (see Figure 46)
• circuit-breaker in the test position (see Figure 47)
• circuit-breaker in connected position (see Figure 48)
Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48

ABB | SACE Emax 2
5 - Environmental conditions
Installation environment Install the circuit-breaker in a dry environment, without dust or corrosive acids, and so that is
not subject to shock or vibration.
If this is not possible, mount the circuit-breaker in a framework protecting it adequately.
For the dimensions to be considered for installation, see the chapter "6 - Installation" on page
24 where the following information can be found:
• minimum installation volumes of the circuit-breakers and derived versions
• distances to be respected for circuit breakers in a cell
• overall dimensions of the circuit breakers
• drilling of mounting holes
• drilling of the cell door
Temperatures of the installation The mechanical and electrical characteristics are guaranteed between -25 ° C and +70 ° C.
environment
Particular weather conditions The circuit breaker is designed to operate in particularly difficult industrial environments.
It was tested according to:

• IEC 60068-2-1: endurance at low temperatures
• IEC 60068-2-2: hot dry climate
• IEC 60068-2-30: hot humid climate
• IEC 60068-2-52 severity 2: saline mist atmosphere
• IEC 60947 (pollution level ≤ 3)
• IEC60721-3-6 class 6C3
• IEC60721-3-2 class 3C2
NOTE: the circuit-breaker is suitable for installation in environments with saline

concentrations no higher than 10 mg/m3.
Dusty environments It is recommended to install the circuit breaker in suitably ventilated switchgear where
penetration by dust is minimized.
If the environments are dusty (dust> 1mg/m3) it is required to always follow the second level
maintenance procedures.
Vibration The circuit-breaker is insensitive to mechanical or electromagnetic vibrations that meet the
following standards:
• IEC 60068-2-6 a) From 1 to 13Hz with movement equal to 1mm b) From 13 to 100Hz
with constant acceleration equal to 0.7g
• Naval specifications: RINA, BV, GL, ABS, LRs, DNV
22 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 5 - Environmental conditions

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Altitude The circuit breaker maintains its rated operating characteristics up to 2000 meters above sea
level.
Once this altitude is passed, you need to consider reduction of dielectric strength and reduced
cooling capacity of the air.
The following are the corrections expressed as a percentage to be applied to the parameters
according to altitude:
Altitude (m.) 2000 3000 4000 5000

Rated service voltage (V) Ue 100% 88% 78% 68%
Rated current (A) at 40°C 100% 98% 93% 90%
Electromagnetic compatibility The use of specific devices in industrial installations may cause electromagnetic interference
in the electrical system.
The SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers were developed and tested in an EMC environment in
accordance with IEC 60947-2, Annex J and F.
Storage Environment Store the circuit breaker in a dry, dust-free environment free of harsh chemicals.
The storage ambient temperature must be:

• Circuit-breaker in the original packaging, without protection release or Ekip Dip release,
between -40 ° C and + 85 ° C.
• Circuit-breaker in the original packaging, with Ekip Touch protection release, between
-30°C and + 85°C.
NOTE: The storage conditions may differ from the usage conditions.
23 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 5 - Environmental conditions

ABB | SACE Emax 2
6 - Installation
Warnings and precautions The following warnings and precautions must be respected before installing the circuit-breaker
before the installation in the switchgear
WARNING!
• Disconnect the power from the circuit-breaker (power circuit and auxiliary
circuits)
• Make sure the circuit-breaker is disconnected from all sources of energy
• Switch the circuit-breaker to the open position with springs unloaded
NOTE: The trained personnel in charge of handling and lifting must use appropriate
safety equipment.
Mounting of the fixed circuit- Fix the circuit-breaker to a horizontal surface using 4 x M10 screws. See Figure 49.
breaker
Figure 49
WARNING! E2.2, E4.2 and E6.2 circuit breakers can only be installed in a
vertical position
Mounting anti-racking locks Before installing the fixed part, it is necessary to fit the lock that prevents the insertion of circuit-
breakers with different electrical characteristics from the fixed part. See Figure 50.
Information on the assembly is available from the web site http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/
DownloadCenter/, in particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0701.
02 E2.
08 2
10 N-B-S
LEFT
12
16
20
25
08 E2.
10 2
12 H
16
20
MAT 25
CH
ALS
O
THE
RIG
HT
SID
E
Figure 50
24 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 6 - Installation

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Mounting the fixed part of the Fix the fixed part to a horizontal surface using four M8 x 25 screws for E2.2 and E4.2 fixed
withdrawable circuit-breaker. parts, and using six M8 x 25 screws for E6.2 fixed parts. The screws are supplied by ABB. See
Figure 51. Tighten the screws with tightening torque = 30 Nm.
OK
NO
Figure 51
WARNING! E2.2, E4.2 and E6.2 circuit breakers can only be installed in a
vertical position
Types of terminal Emax 2 circuit-breakers can be equipped with different combinations of terminals for the upper
and lower part.
The following are the different types of terminal:
Figure 52 HR - Horizontal rear Figure 53 VR - Vertical rear
Figure 54 SHR - Spread horizontal rear (E2.2) Figure 55 SVR - Spread vertical rear (E2.2)

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Reversal of the position of the If the circuit-breaker is supplied equipped with terminals of the horizontal/rear type, it is possible
vertical/horizontal terminals at any moment to switch from horizontal to vertical and vice versa. (see Figure 56 and Figure
57). Lock the screws with the following tightening torques:
• E2.2 - M6 screws - Tightening torque 8.6 Nm
• E4.2 and E6.2 - M8 screws - Tightening torque 20 Nm
Figure 56
Figure 57

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Connection to the power circuit The connection of a circuit-breaker to the power circuit is performed using the connection
busbars of the electric switchgear fixed to the terminals of the circuit-breaker. The sizing of the
busbars is specified by the designer of the electrical switchgear.
IMPORTANT: it is possible to obtain

d i ff e re n t c a p a c i t i e s f o r t h e
connections by altering the
thickness and number of busbars
in parallel.
Figure 58
The following table provides some examples of the amount and sizes of the connections that
can be used for each type of circuit-breaker:
Dimension of Horizontal Vertical

Circuit-breaker Iu (A)
busbars terminals terminals
E2.2 N S H 800 1x50x10 yes yes
E2.2 N S H 1000 2x50x5 yes yes
E2.2 N S H 1250 2x50x10 yes yes
2x60x10 yes -
E2.2 B N S H 1600
1x100x10 - yes
3x60x10 yes -
2x80x10 - yes
E2.2 B N S H 2000
3x60x10* yes -
2x80x10* - yes
3x60x10 yes -
4x100x5 - yes
E2.2 N S H 2500
3x60x10* yes -
4x100x5* - yes
E4.2 V 2000 2x80x10 yes yes
E4.2 V 2500 2x100x10 yes yes
E4.2 N S HV 3200 3x100x10 yes yes
E4.2 N S HV 4000 4x100x10 yes yes
E6.2 H V X 4000 4x100x10 yes yes
E6.2 H V X 5000 5x100x10 yes yes
E6.2 H V X 6300 7x100x10 yes yes
(*): values for spread terminals

IMPORTANT: before proceeding with the connection between terminals and

connection busbars:
• make sure that contact surfaces of the busbars are free of burrs, dents,
traces of rusting, dust or traces of grease.
• make sure, if aluminium busbars are used, than these are tin plated in the
contact areas.
• make sure that the busbars do not exert forces in any direction on the
terminal.
• for tightening use M12 screws with resistance class 8.8 equipped with
spring washers and lock them with a torque of 70 Nm.
NOTE: Information on the performance of the circuit-breakers in the switchgear in

the various configurations is available from the web site http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/
DownloadCenter/, in particular with the Emax 2 catalogue 1SDC200023D0201.
Dimensions Information on the overall dimensions is available on the web site http://www.abb.com/
abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the Emax 2 catalogue 1SDC200023D0201.
The following drawings are also available in .dxf format:
• 1SDH001000R0100 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed HR VR
• 1SDH001000R0101 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed F
• 1SDH001000R0102 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR
• 1SDH001000R0103 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable F
• 1SDH001000R0104 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed SHR
• 1SDH001000R0105 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable SHR
• 1SDH001000R0106 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed SVR
• 1SDH001000R0107 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable SVR
• 1SDH001001R0100 - E4.2 III-IV Fixed HR VR
• 1SDH001001R0102 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR
• 1SDH001060R0100 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed HR
• 1SDH001060R0101 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed VR
• 1SDH001060R0102 - E6.2 IV FS Fixed HR-VR
• 1SDH001060R0105 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR
• 1SDH001060R0106 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable VR
• 1SDH001060R0107 - E6.2 IV FS Withdrawable HR-VR
• 1SDH001000R0120 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 Fixed Withdrawable Flange
• 1SDH001000R0121 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 Fixed internal mounting
Phase separators Phase separators are available on request. Alternatively, it is possible to position the insulation
barriers to segregate live parts.The Phase separators are mandatory if, between two phases,
the minimum distance between the mounting screws of the circuit-breaker terminals with the
connection bars is less than 14 mm.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Positioning anchor plates The diagram below indicates the distance for positioning the first anchor plate according to the
type of circuit-breaker type and the peak current:
500
L
450
E2.2 E4.2 E6.2
400
350
300
250 L
(1)
200
L [mm]
150
80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260
Ipk [kA] (2)
Figure 59
(1): distance of the first anchor plate from the circuit-breaker terminals
(2): peak current
Earthing The circuit-breaker in fixed version and the fixed part of withdrawable circuit-breaker are
equipped with a screw for the earth connection.
The connection must be implemented by means of a conductor of suitable cross-section
according to the IEC 61439-1 standard.
Clean and degrease the area around the screw before making the connection.
After assembly of the conductor, lock the screw with a torque of 2 Nm.
Figure 60 Figure 61

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Introduction to Ekip protection releases
1 - Presentation
Families and functionality Emax 2 can be configured with 5 different types of protection release, distinguished by family
and functionality. One protection release has a dip-switch interface (Ekip Dip) while the others
are equipped with a touchscreen display (Ekip Touch in all the available versions).
Ekip DIP Ekip TOUCH Ekip Measuring Pro

Ekip Hi-TOUCH
Ekip G TOUCH
Ekip G Hi-TOUCH
Figure 62
All versions of the releases include protection and measurement functions referring to the
primary currents of installation.
The Ekip Touch version can be configured with the Ekip Measuring module in order to extend
the measurement functions or protection and measurement functions (in the Ekip Measuring
Pro version) to voltages, energy and power.
NOTE: The Ekip Hi-Touch, Ekip G Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch versions have the Ekip
Measuring Pro module mounted as standard.
The following chapters describe all the functional and usage specifications of the Ekip DIP and
Ekip Touch releases, organised by topic:
• User interface: for correct use of the interface.
• Protections: description of the protections supplied with each model of the release.
• Measurements: description of the measurements available for each release.
• Test: to allow the operator to perform tests on the unit.
• Self-diagnosis: description of the integrated self-checking function on the release.
• Accessories: presentation of all the accessory modules by release, and the related
additional functions.
All the characteristics are described for each protection release:
Release Page
Ekip Dip 35
Ekip Touch 55
30 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Introduction to Ekip protection releases | 1 - Presentation

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protections Numerous protection functions are available to protect the circuit-breaker in abnormal
conditions of the installation. The combination of the protection functions varies depending on
the type of release, as shown in the following table:
Dip Touch
DISTRIBUTION GENERATORS
Dip Touch Hi-Touch G Touch G Hi-Touch

P. Dip P. Touch P. Touch P. Touch P. Touch
P. Measuring P. Measuring P. Measuring P. Measuring

Pro Pro Pro Pro
P. Hi-Touch P. Hi-Touch
P. G Touch P. G Touch
P. G Hi-
Touch
External sensor
Gext Rc
All the protections are described by type:
Type Available protections Page

DIP protections L ( + functions), S ( + functions), I, G 38
L ( + functions), S ( + functions), I ( +
Touch protections 84
functions), G ( + functions), MCR, CU
Measuring Pro UV, OV, UF, OF, VU, RP and SC (if the Ekip
96
protections Synchrocheck module is also present)
S2, D (+functions), UV2, OV2, UF2, OF2,
Hi-Touch protections 102
Set A-B
G Touch protections S(V), RQ, OQ, OP, UP 111
G Hi-Touch
ROCOF, S2 (V), RQ2 117
protections
The Touch releases can be connected to homopolar and residual current external sensors,
which allow activation of Gext protections (page 220) and Rc protections to be activated
(page 220).

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Measurements The releases allow different additional functions, including a wide selection of measurements.
As for the protections, the availability and combination varies for each version of the release:
Dip Touch
M. Dip M. Touch M. Touch M. Touch M. Touch
M. M. M. M.
Measuring Measuring Measuring Measuring
M. Hi-Touch M. Hi-Touch
All the measurements are described by type:
Type Available measurements Page

Currents, Trip History, Measurement History,
Dip measurements Total Operations of the circuit-breaker, 45
Contact wear
Currents, Trip History, Measurement History,
Touch measurements Peak Factor, Datalogger, Total Operations of 123
the circuit-breaker, Contact wear
Measuring Voltages, Powers, Energies, Frequencies,
130
Measurements Measurement History, Power factor
Hi-Touch
Wave forms, Harmonics, Network analyzer 137
measurements

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Integrated functions: Self- All the protection releases for Emax 2 integrate:
diagnosis, Test and Power
• Self-diagnosis: for testing the internal and external connections, signalling possible faults.
Controller
• Test: for testing and checking the protections and other functionalities.
In addition, releases of the Ekip Touch series can be supplied equipped with Power Controller
to regulate the energy demand.
Dip Touch
Self-diagnosis
Test
Power Controller
The additional functions are described for each protection release:
Release Available functions Page

Ekip Dip Test, self-diagnosis 47, 49
Ekip Touch test, self-diagnosis, power controller 141, 144, 151

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Accessory modules The Emax 2 circuit-breakers and Ekip releases can be accessorized as indicated in the
combination tables on page 153.
Various types of modules are available, differing in functionality and allocation of connection.
The modules that can be connected directly to the solid-state release are:
Name Description Page

Ekip Measuring Power supply, protection and
164
Ekip Measuring Pro measurement modules.
Ekip Signalling 4K Signalling module. 178
The modules available for the terminal box of the circuit-breaker are:

Ekip Supply Power supply module. 162
module for measuring voltage and
Ekip Synchrocheck synchronism between two power 171
sources
Ekip COM Modbus
RS-485,
Profibus, Devicenet,
Communication module 193
Modbus TCP, EtherNet
/ IP,
Profinet, Link
The modules external to the circuit-breaker are:

Power supply and measurement
Ekip Multimeter 222
module.
The supervision, configuration and reporting functions are, in addition, guaranteed with further
modules for temporary power supply and communication (test modules):

Ekip TT Power supply and test module 222
Power supply, communication and
Ekip T&P 222
test module
Power supply and communication
Ekip Bluetooth 221
module

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Dip protection release
1 - Operator interface
Introduction The operator interface of the Ekip Dip protection release allows you to:
• Set the parameters relating to the available protections.
• View the status of the release and alarms.
• Connect to the frontal connector to communicate and perform the tripping test.
Components of the interface The Ekip Dip operator interface appears as follows:
Figure 63
The following table provides a description of the components of the interface:
Position Type Description

A Protection LED L (alarm and trip)
B Protection LED L (prealarm)
C Protection LED S (alarm and trip)
LED
D Protection LED I (trip)
E Protection LED G (alarm and trip)
F Power LED (release powered and on)
G Protection L dip-switch (threshold I1)
H Protections: Protection S dip-switch (threshold I2)
I thresholds Protection I dip-switch (threshold I3)
L Protection G dip-switch (threshold I4)
M Protection L dip-switch (time t1)
N Protections: times Protection S dip-switch (time t2 and type of curve)
Or Protection G dip-switch (time t4 and type of curve)
P Settings Neutral and Frequency dip-switch
Q Test pushbutton
Test
R Test connector
IMPORTANT: The figure above refers to a an Ekip Dip, LSIG version. In the
case of Ekip Dip versions LI or LSI, LEDs and dip-switches related to the
protections present are available.
35 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Dip protection release | 1 - Operator interface
ABB | SACE Emax 2
LED The LEDs are useful on Ekip Dip in order to distinguish and identify various types of information
on the protection release, the circuit-breaker and state of the line currents.
Operational conditions
The operation of the LED is determined by the power supply conditions of the release:
• With the release energized (by current sensors or by auxiliary power supply or by Ekip TT
or by Ekip T&P or by Ekip Bluetooth) the LEDs are operational for all the signals.
• With the release de-energized, the LEDs are limited to signalling of the last switch-off or
trip event (combined with the check via iTest, described below).
NOTE: with the release off, the operation of the LEDs is guaranteed if the internal
battery of the release is working properly.
Information
The LEDs combined with the protections provide various information, with different combinations
of lighting and blinking.
NOTE: all the combinations related to protection LED signals are described in chapter
Self-diagnosis and signalling , on page 49.
The Power LED provides information on the power status of the protection release:
• LED on (default configuration) fixed or blinking, signals release energized.
• LED off signals release de-energized.
NOTE: With the Ekip T&P and Ekip Bluetooth modules and the Ekip Connect software
it is possible to configure how the Power LED functions (LED fixed or blinking).
Protections: thresholds The thresholds of all the protections can be modified with various dip-switches, as specified
on the serigraph of the interface.
The values of the protections make reference to the current In, a nominal value of the release
defined by the Rating Plug.
IMPORTANT:
• Modification of the thresholds must be performed in the absence of

protection alarms.
• Modifications carried out in alarm conditions are accepted by the release
when resting condition is restored (absence of protection alarms).
Protections: times The times and the curves of the protections can be modified with various dip-switches, as
specified on the serigraph of the interface.
IMPORTANT:
• Modification of the times must be performed in the absence of protection

alarms.
• Modifications carried out in alarm conditions are accepted by the release
when resting condition is restored (absence of protection alarms).
Settings Two further settings are available:

• Neutral allows the activation and adjustment of the protections on the Neutral channel
• Frequency allows the selection of the installation frequency.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
iTest pushbutton The iTest push-button is useful for three operations:

• Perform tests (circuit-breaker opening command and LED test).
• Reset the signal for intervention of the protection as a result of a trip.
• With the release off, check the information relating to the switch-off or tripping event.
NOTE: pressing iTest with the release off, for approximately 4 seconds switches on:
• the Power LED, if the release is off due to an energy drop(primary current less than
the minimum level of operation, removal of auxiliary power supply with air circuit-
breaker, etc…).
• the protection tripped LED if the release is off due to a protection trip.
Test connector The test connector allows the connection of Ekip TT, Ekip T&P and Ekip Bluetooth modules, in
order to perform the following operations:
• Temporary energizing of the release to check the status, and perform the opening test
(option possible with all the front interface modules).
• Analysis, supervision and setting of additional parameters through external communication
test units (Ekip T&P, Ekip Bluetooth).
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 - Protections
L Protection The protection L protects against overloads
NOTE: the protection is available and active for all the versions of the release.
t I1 L
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips in a time that decreases as the
current read increases.
t1 Parameters
All the parameters that can be modified by the user affect the response curve, and related
I tripping times.
Parameter Description
The value I1 contributes in calculating the tripping time, and also
defines the current value that, if exceeded, activates the protection (in
reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the ordinate).
Threshold (I1) IMPORTANT:

• The protection is activated and starts timing for currents
between 1.05 and 1.2 of the threshold I1 set (1).
• The delay is interrupted if the current drops below the
activation threshold.
The value t1 contributes in calculating the tripping time (in reference
to the curve, T1 affects the entire curve shifting it as a whole along the
vertical axis).
Time (t1)
IMPORTANT:
• the minimum tripping time of the protection is 1 second.
• If according to the calculation the tripping time is less, it
is automatically limited to 1 second.
Example (with I1 set to 400 A): the protection is activated for currents read between 420 A
(1)
and 480 A.
With the modules Ekip T&P or Ekip Bluetooth and with the Ekip Connect software, it is possible
to activate the function Thermal Memory, and adjust the threshold of Prealarm. See page
43.
38 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Dip protection release | 2 - Protections

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection S The protection S protects against the selective short circuit.
NOTE: the protection is available for LSI and LSIG versions of the release.
t I2 S
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed or dynamic time
(the time decreases as the current read increases).
Parameters
t2
I tripping times.
By setting the threshold dip-switches to the Off position, the protection
Enabling
is disabled.
Determines the dynamic of the curve and the tripping time, fixed or
dynamic according to the selection:
Type of curve
NOTE: the calculation of the tripping time of the inverse time
curve is based on a mathematical expression. The details are
provided in the table on page 44.
It defines the current value that if exceeded activates the protection (in
IMPORTANT:
Threshold (I2)
• The I2 threshold set must be higher than the I1 threshold.
An incorrect configuration returns an alarm signal.
• The delay is interrupted if the current drops below the
activation threshold.
The selected function determines the contribution of t2:
• fixed time: t2 is the delay time between the exceeding of the I2
threshold and the sending of the opening command.
• Dynamic time: t2 contributes in calculating the tripping time (in
reference to the curve, t2 affects the entire curve, shifting it as a whole
Time (t2)
along the vertical axis).
IMPORTANT: the minimum tripping time of the protection is

t2. If according to the calculation the tripping time is less, it
is automatically limited to t2
With the modules Ekip T&P or Ekip Bluetooth and with the Ekip Connect software, it is possible
to activate the function Thermal Memory. See page 43.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection I The protection I protects against instantaneous short circuit.
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed non-adjustable
time.
t I3 I Parameters
The user can set the activation threshold.

t3 Parameter Description
I Enabling
is disabled.
Threshold (I3)
IMPORTANT: The I3 threshold set must be higher than the
I2 threshold. An incorrect configuration returns an alarm
signal.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection G The protection G protects against an earth fault.
NOTE: the protection is available for the LSIG version of the release.
t I4 G
t4 Parameters
I tripping times.
By setting the dip-switches of the threshold in one of the available
combinations other than Off, the protection is enabled.
If enabled, the protection is inhibited automatically by the release in two
conditions:
• Disconnection of one or more current sensors.
• Current measured on one of the phases is higher than a maximum
value.
Enabling
IMPORTANT: the maximum current value that deactivates
protection G varies according to the threshold set:
• 8 In (with I4 ≥ 0.8 In).
• 6 In (with 0.5 In ≤ I4 < 0.8 In).
• 4 In (with 0.2 In ≤ I4 < 0.5 In).
• 2 In (with I4 < 0.2 In).
Type of curve
NOTE: the calculation of the tripping time of the inverse time
curve is based on a mathematical expression. The details are
Threshold (I4)
IMPORTANT: the delay is interrupted if the current drops
below the activation threshold.
• Fixed time: t4 is the delay time between the exceeding of the I4
threshold and the sending of the opening command.
• Dynamic time: t4 contributes in calculating the tripping time (in
reference to the curve, t4 affects the entire curve, shifting it as a whole
Time (t4)
along the vertical axis).

is automatically limited to t4.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Neutral and Frequency Adjusting the neutral setting serves to characterize the protections L, S and I on the Neutral
pole with a control factor different to the other phases.
NOTE: use the adjustment of the neutral setting only with 4P or 3P circuit-breakers
with external neutral: with 3P circuit-breakers and neutral protection active, the release
signals the absence of the current sensor.
The adjustment of the frequency is used in order to set the installation frequency (between 50
and 60 Hz).
Neutral Parameters
The user can activate the protection and set the percentage for calculation of the protection
thresholds.
Enabling
on the Neutral line is disabled.
Represented as a percentage; it defines the multiplication factor of
the neutral current, for calculating the activation threshold of the
protections:
• 50%: lowest tripping threshold (in reference to the curves of the
Threshold (InN)
protections, the Neutral current is considered double the real one).
• 100%: tripping threshold equal to the other phases.
• 200%: highest tripping threshold (in reference to the curves of the
Limitations
The adjustment of the Neutral threshold to value of 200% must be performed considering the
following formula: (I1 * InN) ≤ Iu.
I1 indicates the threshold of protection L in Amperes (example: 600 A), InN is the neutral
threshold expressed as a multiplication factor (example: 1.5), Iu indicates the size of the circuit-
breaker (example: 1000 A).

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Additional protections The Ekip T&P and Ekip Bluetooth modules, and the Ekip Connect software, allow you to set
some protections not available via dip-switch:
• Thermal Memory
• Protection T
• Prealarm Threshold
• Hardware trip
Thermal Memory
This function, available for protections L and S, reduces the tripping time of the protection
based on the time elapsed between multiple trips caused by heating of the cables.
IMPORTANT: for the protection S the function can be activated if the selected
curve is time-dependent.
Protection T
The protection T protects the circuit-breaker against abnormal temperatures recorded by the
protection release.
The protection T is always active; via Ekip Connect it is possible to enable tripping, which takes
place for temperatures t < -25 °C or t > 85 °C.
Prealarm
The prealarm L notifies that the current measured is close to the activation threshold of the
protection L.
The prealarm threshold is expressed as a percentage value of the I1 threshold, and is adjustable
between 40% and 90% (default value).
Example: with I1 = 0.6 In and prealarm threshold = 50%, the prealarm is activated for currents
greater than 0.3 In
The prealarm state is activated for currents higher than the threshold set, and is deactivated
for:
• current less than the prealarm threshold.
• current greater than the activation threshold of protection L.
Hardware Trip
The Hardware trip protection protects against internal disconnections of the circuit-breaker.Via
Ekip Connect it is possible to enable the trip command, which is sent if one or more of the
following events is detected:
• Current sensors disconnected (internal or external if enabled)
• Rating Plug disconnected
• Trip Coil disconnected
• Internal problems with the protection release.
IMPORTANT: the protection trips if the error conditions persist more than 1
second.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Summary table of protections
Threshold tolerance Calculation Example

ABB ANSI (5) Threshold (1) Time (1) Tolerance t t (3)
(3)
formula t t (2) calculation t t (2)
t t = 6.75 s with:
I1 = activation for If in the t1 = tt = ± 10 % with If ≤ 6 In
L 49 I1 = 0.4 In; t1 = 3
0.4…1 In range (1.05...1.2) x I1 3…144 s (9 t1) / (If / I1) 2 ± 20 % with If > 6 In
s; If = 0.8 In
The better of the
S I2 = ± 7 % with I2 ≤ 6 In t2 =
50 TD t t = t2 - two values:
(t = k) 0.6...10 In ± 10 % with I2 > 6 In 0.1…0.8 s
± 10 % or ± 40 ms
S t t = 5 s con:
I2 = ± 7 % with I2 ≤ 6 In t2 = tt = ± 15 % with If ≤ 6 In
(t = k / 51 I2 = 1 In; t2 = 0.8
0.6...10 In ± 10 % with I2 > 6 In 0.1…0.8 s (100 t2) / (If) 2 ± 20 % with If > 6 In
l 2) s; If = 4 In
I3 = Not
I 50 ± 10 % t t ≤ 30 ms - -
1.5...15 In adjustable
The better of the
G 50N I4 (4)= t4 =
±7% t t = t4 - two values:
(t = k) TD 0.1...1 In 0.1…0.8 s
± 10 % or ± 40 ms
G t t = 0.32 s with:
I4 (4)= t4 = tt =
(t = k / 51N ±7% I4 = 0.8 In; t4 = ± 15 %
0.1...1 In 0.1…0.8 s 2 / (If / I4) 2
l 2) 0.2 s; If = 2 In
Defined by
Iinst - - Instantaneous - - -
ABB
(1)
See the serigraph for the available combinations.
(2)
The calculation of t t is valid for values of If that have exceeded the activation threshold of the protection.
(3)
Tolerances valid with release energized in service conditions or with the auxiliary; tripping time ≥ 100 ms, temperature and currents within operating
limits. If the conditions are not guaranteed, the tolerances in the table shown below apply.
(4)
In the presence of an auxiliary power supply all the thresholds are active. If the auxiliary power supply is not present, the minimum threshold is
automatically limited to the higher value between 100 A and 0.3 In
(5)
ANSI / IEEE C37-2 encoding.
Key
• (t=k) - Fixed time curve.

• (t=k/I2) - Dynamic time curve.
• tt - Tripping time.
• If - Primary fault current.
Tolerances in particular cases
If the conditions defined in point (3)

of the above table are not guaranteed, the following tolerances apply:
Protection Threshold Tolerance Tolerance t t

L activation for If in the range (1.05...1.2) x I1 ± 20 %
S ± 10 % ± 20 %
I ± 15 % ≤ 60 ms
G ± 15 % ± 20 %

ABB | SACE Emax 2
3 - Measurements
Introduction Measurements The Ekip DIP release records various items of information, useful for analysis and consultation:
• Instantaneous measurements of phase currents.
• Measurement of the maximum and minimum currents recorded with an adjustable interval.
• Trip Log.
• List of events, changes of state and alarms recorded by the release
• Contact wear value.
• Number of mechanical and electrical operations.
NOTE: all the information is available with Ekip T&P and Ekip Bluetooth modules and
with the Ekip Connect software. The Instantaneous measurements are also available
with the Ekip Multimeter switchgear unit.
Instantaneous currents The following table summarises the measurements of the instantaneous currents:
Standard
Type of Measurement Range operation Accuracy
range
Phase currents (I1, I2, I3, INe) 03…16 In 0.2…1.2 In 1%
NOTE: the precisions specified in the table refer to the range of normal operation
Maximum and minimum The release is able to record the maximum and minimum current, measured inside an interval
currents that can be programmed by the user.
Every measurement recorded is accompanied by the following information:

• Recording interval.
• Phase and value of maximum and minimum current measured.
• Date and time of the recording (referring to the internal clock).
NOTE: in the case of the minimum current, if the value drops below the 0.03 In
threshold, it will be recorded and represented by the symbol “…” in the measurement
field.
Trips The release is able to record the last 30 openings of the circuit-breaker (trips) caused by
protection trips.
The trips include useful information relating to each trip:
• The protection that caused the trip.
• The progressive number of the trip.
• The date and time of the opening (referring to the internal clock).
• The measurements associated to the trip protection.
45 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Dip protection release | 3 - Measurements

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Contact wear Contact wear indicates the state of deterioration of the main contacts of the circuit-breaker.
The value is expressed as a percentage, and is 0% in the case of no wear, and 100% in the
case of total wear.
It is calculated automatically by the release at every trip for protection or, in the presence of an
auxiliary power supply, also at every manual opening of the circuit-breaker.
Number of operations In the presence of auxiliary power, the release records a series information relating to openings
of the circuit-breaker:
• Number of manual operations.
• Total number of operations (manual + trips).
46 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Dip protection release | 3 - Measurements

ABB | SACE Emax 2
4 - Test
Presentation Test The Ekip TT, Ekip T&P and Ekip Bluetooth modules connected to the Ekip Dip release allow
you to perform various tests:
• Release LED test
• Check on the presence of the internal battery.
• Circuit-breaker opening command test (trip test).
• Protection test
LED test The LED test can be performed directly on Ekip Dip:
Phase Operation
1 Connect a module to the front test connector of frontal test
2 Press the iTest push-button for at least 6 seconds, but less than 9 seconds
3 When the protection LEDs light up, release the iTest push-button
Check the following switch-on sequence:
• S, I, G LEDs on fixed.
4
• L Prealarm and L Alarm LEDs that alternate 3 times.
• All the protection LEDs off
Battery test The battery check is integrated in the LED test procedure, except for the battery error signal:
• if the battery is absent or not working, after iTest is pressed the error is signalled by 4
flashes of the prealarm LED L.
• if the battery is present and working, the LED test proceeds as in the normal procedure.
Protection test In order to perform the protection test, follow the instructions below:
Phase Operation
1 Make sure that the CB is closed and that there are no primary currents present
2 Connect Ekip T&P or Ekip Bluetooth to the front test connector
3 Start the communication with Ekip Connect
Open the Information page and select the Test command, which opens the
4
protection test page
5 Set up the test as required and verify that the release functions properly
Further information on Ekip Connect is available from the web site http://www.abb.com/
abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the manual 1SDH000891R0002.
47 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Dip protection release | 4 - Test

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Opening command test The opening command test can be performed directly on the release or from Ekip Connect.
To perform the release test:
Phase Operation
2 Connect a module to the front test connector of frontal test
3 Press the iTest push-button for at least 9 seconds
4 Check that the CB opens and that the TU Reset button comes out
To perform the test from Ekip Connect:
Phase Operation
2 Connect Ekip T&P or Ekip Bluetooth to the front test connector
4 Select the Trip Test command
5 Check that the CB opens and that the TU Reset button comes out
Further information on Ekip Connect is available from the web site http://www.abb.com/
abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the manual 1SDH000891R0002.
48 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Dip protection release | 4 - Test

ABB | SACE Emax 2
5 - List of alarms and signals
LED view The Ekip Dip release continuously monitors its own operating status and that of all the devices
to which it is connected. All the signals are available with the front LEDs.
The protection LEDs provide information with various combinations of lighting and flashing,
while the Power LED, as described on page 36, indicates the power status of the release.
Figure 64
NOTE: with release in LI and LSI version, the expression “all the LEDs” must be
adapted to the maximum number of LEDs available
49 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Dip protection release | 5 - List of alarms and signals
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Summary table of LED signals

The following table summarises the signals available with the protection LEDs and the operations to be carried out in response to
alarms or fault conditions signalled.
3 4
Slow flashing 2 flashes flashes flashes
Type of Information Fast flashing (2 Hz) On and fixed
(0.5Hz) every 2s every every
3s 4s HELP
All R+G
All R+G
R (single)
R (single)
Colour and LED
All R
All R
All R
All R
G
G
Internal configuration
x x x A
error
Trip coil disconnected
or trip command x B
failed
Current sensors
x B
disconnected
Rating plug error X B+E
Protection delay x C
Temperature alarm (1) x C
L prealarm x C
Trip (2) x C
Hardware trip (3) x x B
Installation error x E
Parameters error x D
Circuit-breaker state
x B
not defined or in error
Error on local bus x F
Maintenance alarm x F
(1)
The temperature alarm is signalled by lighting of the protection L and I red LEDs.
(2)
The last trip can also be displayed with release off, by pressing the iTest key.
(3)
The hardware trip is signalled by lighting of the Prealarm L yellow LED and the protection I red LED.
Key to LED colours
The above table lists the colors of the LEDs, to be interpreted as follows:
• R = red LED (Alarm LED L, S, I, G).
• G = yellow LED (Prealarm LED L).
NOTE: for further details refer to the table listing the components of the interface, available on page 35.
HELP
Some led signals indicate connection errors or operational errors that require corrective or
maintenance operations. The following are the suggestions for checking referring to the
preceding LED table:
HELP note Operation

A Contact ABB.
Check the connections between release and accessories (rating plug,
B
trip coil, sensors, etc).
C Normal operation/signalling provided by the release.
Error in setting of the dip-switches. Check and correct the following
conditions:
D • All the dip-switches of L are in the ON position.
• I1 > I2 or I2 > I3.
• Iu < (2 * In * I1) in the case where InN = 200 %.
E Carry out installation.
Connect via Ekip Connect in order to set the local bus or to confirm
F
maintenance.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
6 - Additional Ekip Dip functions

The Ekip T&P and Ekip Bluetooth modules, and the Ekip Connect software, allow you to set
some functions and parameters not available via dip-switch:
• Maintenance
• Local Bus
• Date and time.
Maintenance The Maintenance function allows signalling to the user, via LED, that:
• 1 year has passed since the last maintenance.
• Contact wear has increased by more than 10% compared with the value at the last
maintenance.
Via Ekip Connect there are 2 selections available:
• Activation: it allows to the maintenance function to be activated.
• Reset: it allows confirmation of maintenance on the release; the current date and contact
wear values are recorded, and the signal is reset.
The reference date is that of the internal clock, and the elapsed time is calculated both with the
release on and off (provided that the internal battery is working).
NOTE: manual modification of the date can cause variations in the calculation of the
time elapsed, and therefore the date of the next maintenance.
NOTE: the maintenance signal due to increased contact wear is active for values
higher than 20%.
Local Bus In order to activate communication on the local bus with the Ekip Link, Ekip Multimeter or Ekip
Signalling 10K modules, the Local Bus parameter must be enabled.
NOTE: communication with the modules is active if the auxiliary power supply is
present.
Date and time. The Ekip Dip release has a user-adjustable internal clock.
Setting the date can be useful for some functions such as the recording of trips and minimum
and maximum currents, and maintenance.
The clock is active if the internal battery of the release is working.
52 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Dip protection release | 6 - Additional Ekip Dip functions
ABB | SACE Emax 2
7 - Operating features
Electrical characteristics The following are the electrical characteristics for correct operation of the Ekip Dip release.
Primary operating currents
The Ekip Dip release can be powered directly by the internal current sensors, with clearly
defined primary currents.
The operating conditions for proper operation are listed below:
Parameter Operating limits

> 80 A (E1.2 - E2.2 - E4.2)
Minimum three-phase turn-on current
>160 A (E6.2)
Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz ± 10 %
Harmonic distortion Conforming to 60947-2
Auxiliary power supply
The Ekip Dip release can be connected to an external auxiliary power source, useful for
activating some functions such as communication on the local bus or recording of manual
operations.
The auxiliary power can be supplied by the modules of the Ekip Supply range (for further
functional details, see page 162), or with direct connection to a terminal box.
The direct connection must be made guaranteeing the operating following conditions:

Voltage 24 Vdc galvanically isolated.
Tolerance ± 10 %
Maximum ripple ±5%
Maximum inrush current @ 24 V 10 A per 5 ms
Maximum rated power @ 24 V 4W
Insulated with a two-pole shielded cable
Connection cable
(BELDEN 3105A type or equivalent)
IMPORTANT:
• With a direct connection, the power must be galvanically isolated and must
ensure the insulation characteristics retrieved from IEC 60950 (UL 1950)
or equivalent standards that ensure a common mode current, or leakage
current, (see IEC 478/1, CEI 22/3) no greater than 3.5 mA.
• The Ekip Supply modules do not require galvanic insulation.
53 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Dip protection release | 7 - Operating features
ABB | SACE Emax 2
8 - Default parameters
Ekip DIP default parameters The Ekip Dip releases are supplied with the following default parameters, some adjustable with
the front DIPs (protections, Frequency, Neutral), other via front bus (Can, modules).
Protection/Parameter Value
L 1 In; 144 s
S (1) Off; 0.1 s
I 4 In
G (1) Off; 0.1 s
Frequency 50 Hz
Off (for 3P circuit-breaker).
Neutral
50% (for 4P circuit-breaker)
Hardware trip Disabled
Monitor Time 5 min
Local bus Disabled
Alive LED Disabled (Power LED on fixed)
(1)
Protection S available with LSI and LSIG versions of the release. Protection G available with LSIG version.
54 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Dip protection release | 8 - Default parameters
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Touch protection release
1 - Layout of the interface
Functions of the interface The operator interface for Ekip Touch releases allows you to:
• View signals and measurements related to the functions in progress, or recorded events.
• Configure the circuit-breaker, and the installation parameters.
• Set the parameters for available protections and for other functions of the release.
• Set parameters for the connected accessory modules.
• Perform tests.
• Display information on the circuit-breaker, release, and connected accessory modules.
55 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 1 - Layout of the interface
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Components of the interface The operator interface for the Ekip Touch releases appears as follows:
B
C
03:55 D
528.9A
E
L1
95.3V
U12 F
U12 U23 U31 L1 L2 L3 Ne
Figure 65
The following table provides a description of the parts of the interface:
Pos. Description
A Touchscreen display.
Power status LED, green. The possible states are:
B • Off: power supply absent.
• On, fixed or flashing: power supply present, and release on.
C Warning LED, yellow.
D Alarm LED, red.
E HOME key: opens the main page, or the start page.
iTEST key. If the main page or a level 2 page is displayed (see below), pressing it
displays the following pages in succession:
• List of Alarms, if there are any messages present.
F • With information on the Mainboard and release.
• With information on the circuit-breaker.
• Last opening, with information on the last opening.
If the Trip Test item was selected in the Test menu, it runs the opening test.
G Test connector.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Signallings The following table provides a description of the signals of the interface:
LED Description
The possible states are:
Green • Off: power supply absent.
• On, fixed or flashing: power supply present, and release on.
• Off: no warning or error.
• On, flashing quickly: absence of communication with the Mainboard, or
installation error (of the Rating Plug, Ekip Measuring or Ekip Measuring Pro
Yellow
module).
• On, flashing slowly: internal error.
• On, with two quick flashes every 0,5 s: parametrization error.
• On, fixed: prealarm of protection L, or circuit-breaker status error.
• Off: no alarm or error.
• On, flashing quickly: absence of communication with the Mainboard, or trip
Red coil disconnected, or current sensor disconnected, or delay active.
• On, with two quick flashes every 2 s: Rating Plug error.
• On, flashing slowly: internal error.
• On, fixed: signal that opening has occurred.
Structure of the pages The following table illustrates how the pages shown on the display are structured:
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

Diagnosis bar. Alarm list page
Histograms page
Basic protections menu
Advanced protections
menu
Menu page Measurements menu
Main page Settings menu
Test menu
Information menu
Measuring instruments
pages
Measurements pages
NOTE: the level 3 pages are not graphical pages, and are dealt with in chapter “6 -
Menu” on page 65.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Diagnosis bar. The diagnosis bar is present in the main page and the level 2 pages, along the lower side of
the display, and has two functions:
• Show the messages present.
• Open the page Alarm List.
NOTE: the diagnosis bar is not present in the menus or in the pages accessible from
these
The bar appears as follows:
TC disconnected
Figure 66
The following table provides a description of the various areas of the bar:
Pos. Description
It shows the type of message:
• Alarm.
A • Warning, error, or prealarm.

• Information.
• Active delay.
B It displays the messages alternatively, and in succession.
C ABB logo.
The Alarm List it can be opened, if there are messages, by touching the diagnosis bar in the
message display area (on the display, at the bottom left).
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Main page The main page is the page for accessing the level 2 pages.
The page appears as follows:
Figure 67
The following table provides a description of the various areas of the page:
Pos. Function
A Opens the Histograms page.
B Opens the Menu page.
C Opens the Measuring instruments page.
D Opens the Measurements page.
E In the presence of messages, open the Alarm List page.
Start page When switched on, the start page is displayed on the display. The system returns automatically
to this page after some minute of inactivity. The default start page is the page Histograms.
Any graphical level 2 page (accessible from the main page) can be set as the start page,
except for the pages Alarm List and Menu.
To set a page as the start page, you need to:
1. Open the page
2. Keep the HOME key pressed for at least 5 seconds.
3. Select Yes in the confirm window that has opened.
Navigation The following table illustrates how to access the pages through the keys:
To open… Perform these operations…

The main page Press the HOME key.
The start page Press the HOME key, until the start page appears.
If there are messages present, if the diagnostics bar is
displayed:
The Alarm List page
• Touch the display in the message display area, or
• Press the iTEST button.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 - Alarm List Page
Description The Alarm List shows the list of messages present.
When there are messages present the page is accessed:

• By touching the diagnosis bar, in the message display area.
• By pressing the key iTEST key.
NOTE: when the menus, or the pages that can be accessed from them are displayed
iTEST key doesn't open the page Alarm List.
Components of the page The page appears as follows:
A B
Alarm List
TC disconnected
Rating Plug
RatingPlug installation C
CB undefined
Figure 68
Pos. Function
A Opens the page displayed previously.
B Shows the name of the page.
It shows the list of messages of:
• Alarm.
C • Warning, error, or prealarm.

• Information.
• Active delay.
60 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 2 - Alarm List Page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
3 - Histograms page
Description The Histograms:

• This is the default start page (open when switched on).
• Shows the histogram of the voltage and current measurements, acquired in real time by
the release.
Figure 69
Pos. Description
Histogram ordinate, with the measurements expressed as percentages of the
A
nominal values set.
Bars that represent the measurements of phase-to-phase voltages U12 U23 U31,
and of the phase currents L1 L2 L3 and of the neutral Ne:
• In blue: no alarm.
• In yellow: voltage or current in prealarm, compared with the thresholds set (see
B the chapter "9 - Touch protections" from page 84, and the chapter "10 - Measuring
Pro protections" from page 96).
• In red: voltage or current in alarm, compared with the thresholds set (see the
chapter "9 - Touch protections" from page 84, and the chapter "10 - Measuring
Pro protections" from page 96).
Abscissa of the histogram.
NOTE:
C • The references of the voltages are shown with the Ekip Measuring
accessory module.
• The Ne current reference is shown with circuit-breaker configured with
neutral.
Signalling and functions in progress:
• Remote connection, visible with auxiliary voltage and Ekip COM accessory
modules.
D
• or Auxiliary voltage or Test connection.
• or If the Dual Set function is enabled (see the Settings menu), the
letter identifies the active configuration.
E Current time.
• Measurement of the maximum phase current, as an absolute value (Ampere).
F
• Phase to which the measurement refers.
61 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 3 - Histograms page
Pos. Description
Displayed with the Ekip Measuring module:
• Measurement of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage, as an
G
absolute value (Volt).
• Concatenated to which the measurement refers.
Viewed with the Ekip Measuring module, it indicates the presence of
H several pages, that you can scroll through by touching the sides of the
display, and in which of these pages it is located.
I Diagnosis bar.
Possible operations In this page, you can do the following:

• Without the Ekip Measuring module, when the histograms area is touched, open the main
page.
• With the Ekip Measuring module, when the sides of the display are touched, open a page
that displays a summary of the measurements in progress (maximum phase current,
maximum phase-to-phase voltage, power factor, active, reactive and apparent power).
62 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 3 - Histograms page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
4 - Measuring instruments page
Description The Measuring instruments pages show an indicator of the maximum phase current, or the
maximum phase-to-phase voltage, or the reactive or apparent active power.
Components of the pages The pages appear as follows:
A
.... B
....
528.9 A C
L3
E D
Figure 70
The following table provides a description of the various areas of the pages:
Pos. Description
Type of indicator:
• A: ammeter, with measurement of the maximum phase current.
• V: ammeter, with measurement of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage.
• kW: measurement of the active power.
A • kVAR: measurement of the reactive power.
• kVA: measurement of the apparent power.
NOTE: all the indicators except the ammeter are available with the Ekip
Measuring module.
B Measurement expressed as percentage of the nominal value set.
C Measurement as an absolute value (A, V, kW, kVA).
D Phase current or phase-to-phase voltage, to which the measurement refers.
E Diagnosis bar.
Possible operations In these pages, you can do the following:

• By touching the sides of the display, scroll through the available indicators.
63 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 4 - Measuring instruments page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
5 - Measurements Page
Description The pages Measurements display a list of measurements in real time of currents, voltages,
active/reactive/apparent power, or relate to the energy meters, or the Power Controller function.
NOTE: the voltage and power measurements, and those related to the energy meters
and the Power Controller function, are available with the Ekip Measuring module.
Components of the pages The pages appear as follows:
A B C
Voltage D
E
Figure 71
The following table provides a description of the various areas of the pages:
Pos. Description
Viewed with the Ekip Measuring module, it indicates the presence of several
A pages, that you can scroll through by touching the sides of the display, and in
which of these pages it is located.
B Signalling and functions in progress (see the Histograms page)
C Current time.
D Unit in which the measurements are displayed.
E Real time measurements of the dimension in position D.
Possible operations In these pages, you can do the following:

• By touching the sides of the display, scroll through the pages with the available measurements.
• In the presence of messages, touching the diagnosis bar opens the page Alarm List.
64 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 5 - Measurements Page
ABB | SACE Emax 2
6 - Menu
Introduction This paragraph illustrates:

• The Menu.
• The structure of the menus.
• How to navigate among the menus
The Menu is the menu access page.

The menus are the level 3 pages that can be displayed on display (see the chapter “1 -
Layout of the interface" and the paragraph "Structure of the pages" on page 57”), and they are
composed of lists of:
• Submenus.
• Parameters that can be set.
• Commands that can be performed.
Selecting a menu item can:

• Open a submenu.
• Open the page Modify Parameter to set a parameter.
• Display scrollable lists of information (e.g. on circuit-breaker, Mainboard, release, connected
modules), measurements in real time, events recorded.
• Open a graphical page (secondary).
• Perform a command (e.g. reset or test).
A B C
Protections Advanced Measurements
Settings Test About
G D E F
Figure 72
Pos. Function
A Open the Protections menu.
B Open the Advanced Protections menu.
C Open the Measurements menu.
D Open the Settings menu.
E Open the Test menu.
F Open the Information menu.
G In the presence of messages, open the Alarm List page.
65 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 6 - Menu

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Components of the menus The menus appear as follows:
A B C
Advanced D
S(V) Protection
Current-Voltage Protection (51V)
S2(V) Protection
Current-Voltage Protection (51V)
MCR Protection
Short circuit
D Protection
Directional (67)
IU Protection
Current unbalance (46) D
Figure 73
The following table provides a description of the various areas of the menus:
Pos. Function
A It opens the higher level menu, or if there isn't one, the Menu page.
B It displays the name of the menu.
• It displays a list of the available submenus, the parameters that can be set,
and the commands that can be performed
C
• Depending on which it is selected, it opens a submenu, the Edit Parameters
page, or an information page, or performs a command.
D Scroll the list
NOTE: in the menus, under each parameter, the current value is shown.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protections Menu The following table illustrates the submenus and the protections associated to the menu
Protections, and the Ekip Touch releases in which they can be found.
IMPORTANT:
• Selecting a protection opens the list of parameters that can be set for the selected
protection.
• With Hi-Touch and G Hi-Touch releases, and the Dual Set function enabled (see
the Settings menu), the protections can be set according to two configurations
(Set A and Set B), of which the default configuration can be selected.
Release
Protections
Protection L
Touch G-Touch
Protection S
Protection S2 - -
• Set A (1) G
Protection I Touch Hi-Touch G-Touch
• Set B (1) Hi-Touch
G-Touch
Protection G Touch (2) (2)
Protection Gext (3) Touch G-Touch
(1)
Submenus available with Hi-Touch and G Hi-Touch releases, and the Dual Set function enabled (see the
Settings menu).
(2)
With Touch and G Touch releases, alternative protection to Gext, therefore available only without external
homopolar toroid or S.G.R. (see the menu Settings, Circuit-breaker, Earth protection).
(3)
Protection available with external homopolar toroid or S.G.R. (see the menu Settings, Circuit-breaker,
Earth protection), and alternative to RC protection (see the Advanced menu).

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Advanced menus The following table illustrates the submenus and the protections associated to the menu
Advanced, and the Ekip Touch releases in which they can be found.
IMPORTANT:
• Selecting a protection opens the list of parameters that can be set for the selected
protection.
• With Hi-Touch and G Hi-Touch releases, and the Dual Set function enabled (see
the Settings menu), the protections can be set according to two configurations
(Set A and Set B), of which the default configuration can be selected.
Release
Advanced
Protection S(V) - - G-Touch
Protection S2(V) - - -
protection MCR Touch G-Touch
Protection D - -
Protection IU
Touch
Protection RC (2) G-Touch
Hi-Touch
Protection UV Touch (3)
Protection UV2 - -
Protection OV Touch (3) G-Touch
Protection OV2 - -
Protection RV - -
Protection VU Touch (3) G-Touch
• Set A (1) Protection UF Touch (3) G
• Set B (1)
Protection UF2 - Hi-Touch - Hi-Touch
Protection OF Touch (3) G-Touch
Protection OF2 - -
Protection ROCOF - - -
Protection RP Touch (3) Hi-Touch
Protection RQ - -
Protection OP - -
Protection OQ - -
Protection UP - - G-Touch
Synchrocheck Protection (4) Touch (3)
Signaling Touch (3)
Hi-Touch
Current thresholds
Touch
Function
(1)
Submenus available with Hi-Touch and G Hi-Touch releases, and the Dual Set function enabled (see the
Settings menu).
(2)
Protection available with Rating Plug RC and Ekip Measuring Pro modules, and external differential toroid
or RC (see the menu Settings, Circuit-breaker, Earth protection), and alternative to the Gext protection (see
the Protections menu).
(3)
Protection available with Ekip Measuring Pro module.
(4)
Protection available with the Ekip Synchrocheck module.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Settings Menu This menu allows you to configure additional settings to those of the protections and of the
advanced protections and functions.
The following table illustrates the submenus and the parameters associated to the menu
Settings, up to Level 3 (if present). The options corresponding to parameters and commands
are underlined, to distinguish from those corresponding to submenus.
Options
Settings
• Hardware Trip: opens the Edit Parameters page, to enable/disable
opening in the case of hardware problem of the release.
• T Protection: it opens a list of the parameters that can be set for
the overtemperature protection.
• Neutral Protection: available with a configuration with neutral, it
opens a list of the parameters that can be set.
Circuit-breaker
• Earth protection: opens a list of the parameters that can be set.
• Function: allows access to the menu in order to program the
opening action.
• Installation: displayed if a Rating Plug or Ekip Measuring or Ekip
Measuring Pro module is not installed. It opens a list of the modules to
be installed.
Line frequency Opens the Edit Parameters page, to set the Line frequency.
• Local/Remote: opens the Edit Parameters page, to set the local or
remote connection.
• Local Bus: opens the Edit Parameters page, to enable/disable the
Local Bus
• Ekip Measuring, Ekip Synchrocheck, etc: these open a list of the
Modules (1)
parameters that can be the set for the electronic accessories.
• Function: allows the access to the menus in order to program
Switch On LOCAL, Signalling RESET, YO Command, and YC
Command actions (see the chapter "19 - Operating features", and the
paragraph "Functional specifications", on page 148).
• Enable: opens the Edit Parameters page, to enable/disable the
function.
Power • Load Operating Mode: available with Power Controller enabled,
Controller opens a list of the loads, by enable/disable.
• Power Limits: available with Power Controller enabled, opens a list
of the thresholds of the function to be set.

Options
Settings
• I Arm Analysis: opens the Edit Parameters page, to enable/disable
the calculation of harmonics for the currents.
• V Arm Analysis: opens the Edit Parameters page, to enable/disable
calculation of the harmonics for the voltages.
• Monitor Time, V Threshold Low, V Threshold High, Unbalance Th, V
microswitch Th, V Spike Threshold: they open the Edit Parameters
Network
page, to set the parameters (for details on the parameters, see the
Analyzer
chapter "16 - Hi-Touch measurements", and the paragraph "Network
Analyzer", on page 138).
• Sags: opens a list of the parameters that can be set for monitoring
voltage drops.
• Swells: opens a list of the parameters that can be set for monitoring
voltages swells.
• Enable: available if the function is not running, it opens the Edit
Parameters page, to enable/disable the function.
• Num. of Datalogger: available with Datalogger enabled, it opens the
Edit Parameters page, in order to set the number of records.
• Freq. Sampling: available with Datalogger enabled, it opens the Edit
Parameters page, to set the frequency of data logging.
• Datalogger 1: available with Datalogger enabled, opens a list of the
Datalogger (2) parameters that can be set and the commands of the function.
• Datalogger 2: available with the second Datalogger enabled, opens
a list of the parameters that can be set and the commands of the
function.
• Restart both: available with the second Datalogger enabled, it starts
both recordings.
• Stop both: available with the second Datalogger enabled, it stops
both recordings.
• Enable: opens the Edit Parameters page, to enable/disable dual
configuration of the protections.
Dual Set (3)
• Default Set: available with Dual Set enabled, it opens the Edit
Parameters page, to set the default configuration.
• Date: opens the Edit Parameters page, to set the date.
• Time: opens the Edit Parameters page, to set the time
System
• Language: opens the Edit Parameters page, to set the language.
• New Password: it opens the page for insertion of the password.
• Switch On SET B: opens a list of the parameters for programming
the switching of protections from configuration A to configuration
Function
B, or vice versa (see the chapter "19 - Operating features", and the
paragraph "Functional specifications", on page 148).
• Signals: opens the Edit Parameters page, in order to enable/disable
the maintenance required signal, after a year from the last maintenance,
Maintenance
or with contact wear of at least 20% and an increase of 10% compared
to the last maintenance.
(1)
The options contained in the Modules submenu change according to the electronic accessories con-
nected.
(2)
Function available with the release energized with auxiliary voltage.
(3)
Setting available with Hi-Touch and G Hi-Touch releases.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Test Menu This menu allows you to access to the commands in order to perform tests.
The following table illustrates the submenus and the commands associated to the menus
Test, up to Level 3 (if present). The options corresponding to commands are underlined, to
distinguish from those corresponding to submenus.
Option
Test
Auto Test Performs a test on the display and LEDs of the interface.
Trip test Enables the opening test
• Close CB: commands the closing of the circuit-breaker.
CB test
• Open CB: commands the opening of the circuit-breaker.
• Protection S: opens a list of the test commands of the
Zone selectivity protection.
(68) • Protection G: opens a list of the test commands of the
protection.
Information menu This menu allows you to view information on:

• Mainboard and release (serial number, model, software version, etc.).
• The circuit-breaker (serial number, rated current, configuration with or without neutral,
number of poles, fixed or withdrawable version or, state, etc).
• The connected electronic accessories (serial number, model if present, software version
if present, information on state if present, etc).
• Date and time.
Function
Information
It displays:
Protection unit • Information on Mainboard and release.
• Date and time.
Circuit-breaker Displays information on the circuit-breaker.
Modules It displays a list of the electronic accessories connected.
• Load Input Status: shows the Open/Closed status of the
Power Controller loads.
• Load Active: shows the Active/Inactive status of the loads.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Measurements Menu This menu allows you to:

• Open lists of recorded events.
• Display measurements in graphical or numerical form.
• Reset measurements.
The following table illustrates the submenus and the parameters associated to the menu
Measurements up to Level 3 (if present), and the Ekip Touch releases where they can be
found. The options corresponding to parameters and commands are underlined, to distinguish
from those corresponding to submenus.
Options Release
Measurements
• Openings: opens a list of the openings performed.
• Events: opens a list of the recorded events.
History Data Touch
• Measurements: opens a list of the dimensions with
which the history can be displayed. G-Touch
Hi-Touch
It opens the Edit Parameters page, to set the standby G Hi-Touch
Measurement
time between successive recordings of measurements in
interval
the history.
Power factor It displays the power factor measured.
Frequency Shows the frequency measured for the voltages.
• Energy meters: it displays the active, reactive and Touch (1)
apparent energies measured. G-Touch
• Reset Meters: resets the energy meters. Hi-Touch
Energy • Energy RESET: it opens a list of the parameters for G Hi-Touch
programming resetting of the energy counters (see the
chapter "19 - Operating features", and the paragraph "
Functional specifications", on page 148).
It shows the peak factors measured for the phase Touch
Peak factor
currents and of the neutral. G-Touch
Harmonic Opens the Edit Parameters page, to enable/disable the Hi-Touch
distortion alarm with a peak factor greater than 2.1. G Hi-Touch
Touch (1)
Ekip
Opens a list of the measurements related to the G-Touch
Synchrocheck
(2) synchronism function. Hi-Touch
G Hi-Touch

Options Release
Measurements
• Voltage Sequence: it shows the last and penultimate
voltage sequences, positive and negative, measured.
• Counters: it allows you to display the number of
Network Hi-Touch
events monitored by the function that have taken place
Analyzer G Hi-Touch
in the last twenty-four hours and the totals.
• Wave forms: opens a list of the currents and voltages
for which an instantaneous wave form can be displayed.
• Contact wear: shows the estimated percentage of
wear on the contacts
• Last Service Contact Wear: shows the percentage
of contact wear at the last maintenance
• Installation: shows the installation date of the
Touch
circuit-breaker.
G-Touch
Maintenance • Last Maintenance: shows the date of the last
Hi-Touch
maintenance.
G Hi-Touch
• Service RESET: it updates the values of the parameters
Last Service Contact Wear and Last Maintenance,
with the percentage of contact wear and the date set
on the release at the moment of that the command is
selected.
(1)
Measurements available with Ekip Measuring or Ekip Measuring Pro modules.
(2)
Measurements available with Ekip Synchrocheck module.

Last Opening measurements
To open the page, from the menu Measurements, you need to select History, Openings,
and an opening of the list.
Alternatively, if the main page or a level 2 page is displayed (see the chapter “1 - Layout of the
interface", and the paragraph "Structure of the pages”, on page 57”), you can open the page
relating to the last opening by pressing the iTEST key until the page is displayed.
NOTE: when an opening occurs, the page relating to the last opening is opened
automatically.
The page shows details related to the selected opening. To exit the page, press the iTEST key,
which opens the main page.
A B C
Last Trip
14:07:13:406 Mar 04, 2013
D L Protection n°01 E
L1 Ne ....
L2 1885.5A
L3 1903.1A
Figure 74
Pos. Description
A Name of the page.
Time at which the selected opening occurred (time set on the release at the
B
moment of the opening)
Date at which the selected opening occurred (date set on the release at the
C
moment of the opening)
D The protection that tripped.
Number of the selected opening.
E
NOTE: every new opening is associated to an incremental number
F Measurements related to the protection tripped, at the time of opening.

Measurements history
To open the page, from the menu Measurements, you need to select History, Measurements,
and an item in the list.The page shows the history of the measurements performed for the
selected item, in the form of a histogram, and appears as follows:
I max 5min
Mar 04, 2013
Figure 75
Pos. Description
A It cancels the operation, and opens the Measurements list.
B Item selected in the Measurements list.
C Time interval between one measurement and the next.
The quantity with which the history is displayed, and the measurement in
D
numerical form of the bar that is flashing in the histogram.
Date to which the measurement of the flashing bar refers (date set on the
E
release at the moment of the measurement).
Time to which the measurement of the flashing bar refers (time set on the
F
release at the moment of the measurement).
G
nominal value set.
H Bars that represent the measurements of the dimension in position D.
In this page, you can do the following:

• Touch the sides of the display to scroll along the time axis, and select the bar before or
after the flashing bar.
• Return to the list Measurements.

Wave forms
To open the page, from the menu Measurements, you need to select Wave forms, Network
Analyzer, and a quantity in the list. This page shows the wave form of the selected quantity,
acquired at the time of selection, and appears as follows:
A B C
Voltage 12 95,3V
Refresh Harmonics
E F
Figure 76
Pos. Description
A It cancels the operation, and opens the Wave forms list.
B Quantity selected in the Wave forms list.
C The value of the quantity in position B at the time of selection.
D The wave form of the quantity in position B at the time of selection.
E Refresh key: performs a new acquisition.
Harmonics key: available if the measurement of harmonics is enabled
F (see the menu Settings, Network Analyzer), open the Harmonic
Measurements page.

Harmonics Measurement
To open the page, from the page with the wave form, press the key Harmonics.
The page shows the measurements performed for the harmonics of the selected item, in the
form of a histogram.
NOTE: in order to display the measurement of the harmonics, the measurement must
be enabled from the menu Settings, Network Analyzer, selecting I Arm Analysis to
enable measurement of the harmonics of the currents, and V Arm Analysis to enable
measurement of the harmonics of the voltages

A B C D
Harmonics Voltage 12
Harmonic n.1 100% E

F
Figure 77 G
Pos. Description
A It cancels the operation, and opens the Wave forms list.
B Name of the page.
C Quantity in which the harmonics are displayed.
D The harmonic to which the flashing bar in the histogram corresponds.
E Measurement of the flashing bar in the histogram in numerical form.
F
fundamental component.
Bars that represent the measurements of the harmonics of dimension in
G
position C.
In this page, you can do the following:

• Touch the sides of the display to scroll through the harmonics, and select the bar before
or after the flashing bar.
• Return to the list Wave forms.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
7 - Insertion of the password
Description The page for the insertion of the password is open if a parameter to be set is selected, or the
menu Test, or if you want to change the password.
NOTE: insertion of the password is requested, if:
• The password has never been inserted.

• After programming has been cancelled.
• After a few minutes of inactivity have passed.
The password is composed of five digits, each of which can have a value from 0 to 9.
The default value is “00001”, and it must be modified after the first switch-on in order to
prevent access to parameters and tests by unauthorized personnel.
In order to modify the password, from the menu Settings, you need to select System, New
Password.
A B
Password
0 * * * * D
Confirm
Figure 78
E
Pos. Function
A Cancels the operation, and opens the start menu.
B Shows the name of the page.
C Keys to increment and decrement the corresponding digit.
D It displays the digits of the password.
Confirm key:
• Confirmation after inserting a digit in a position from 1 to 4 will automatically
bring you to the next digit.
• When the fifth digit is confirmed, the entire password is confirmed and the
E
selected page is opened.
NOTE:
The Confirm key must be pressed every time you want to confirm a digit.
78 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 7 - Insertion of the password
NOTE:
• If you are changing the password, after the first confirmation of the new password, the
page opens again for the reconfirmation.
• In the case of an incorrect password, the message “Wrong Password” appears for
approximately 3 seconds, and the page for insertion of the password will open again.
• There is no limit to the number of incorrect passwords that you can insert.
• If the password is lost, it can be reset by inserting the Maintenance Password, calculated
from the serial number of the circuit-breaker, and which can be recovered using the Ekip
Connect application on a page reserved for Service: contact ABB.
79 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 7 - Insertion of the password
ABB | SACE Emax 2
8 - Setting the parameters
Modifying a parameter To set a parameter, you need to select it. Selecting a parameter opens the page Modify
Parameter.
There are two possible types of Modify Parameter page:
• By option: consists of a list of the values that can be assigned to the parameter (see page 81).
• By value: graphical page that displays to bar for assigning the parameter a numerical
value within a range 82).
In both the cases, in order to set the parameter, you need to select the desired value.
Programming the release When a value different to the current value is assigned to the parameter, the new value is
indicated in the start menu, and the parameter is associated to a tick symbol. If available, when
going up to the higher level menus, the submenus of which parameters have been modified are
also associated to a tick symbol.
The menu with submenus and parameters with tick signs appears as follows:
S(V) Protection
Enable
On
StartUp enable
On
Function
Step mode
I20 Threshold
0.60In (240A)
Ul Threshold
100% Un (100V)
Figure 79
The following table provides a description of the changes made to the menu:
Pos. Description
Modified submenu parameter. If it is a parameter, the new value assigned is
A
shown.
B Tick symbol, that indicates the submenus and parameters modified.
80 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 8 - Setting the parameters
The tick signs indicate that the changes are not effective. In order make a change effective, the
release must be programmed. To program the release, you need to press the key HOME, that
it opens the page Programming (see page 83). Alternatively, you can go up through the higher
level menus until the page is displayed.
In the page Programming:
• A list of the changes made is displayed.
• You are asked to confirm, cancel, or modify the settings.
NOTE: before confirming a change in the page Programming, other changes can be
made both in the same menu and in higher or lower level menus. In fact, the changes
remain in memory unless they are cancelled in the page Programming, and the
confirmation or the cancellation refers to all the changes made up to that moment
but still not confirmed.
Edit Parameters by option page

NOTE: In the case of Edit Parameters by option, selecting a value returns you
automatically to the start menu.
B C D
A Modify Parameter E
Frequency
50 Hz
60 Hz
E
Figure 80
Pos. Description
B Name of the page.
C Name of the parameter to be set.
D List of the selectable values.
E Scroll the list
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Edit Parameters by value page

NOTE: In the case of Edit Parameters for value, in order to complete the setting and
return to the start menu, you need to confirm the selected value.
Modify Parameter
I20 Threshold
Confirm
Figure 81
Pos. Description
B Name of the page.
C Name of the parameter to be set.
D Value selected for the parameter.
E Bar: represents the range of selectable values graphically.
F Cursor: represents the selected value graphically.
• MIN key: selects the minimum value.
G
• MAX key: selects the maximum value.
H - and + keys: allow you to increase and decrease the value selected.
I Confirm key: confirms the selected value.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Programming Page The page appears as follows:
Programming
S(V) Protection
B
S2(V) Protection
Confirm Abort Modify E
Figure 82
Pos. Description
A Name of the page.
B List of changes made.
Confirm key: confirms the changes (programs the release), and opens the
C
Menus page.
D Cancel key: cancels the changes, and opens the Menus page.
Modify key: it keeps the changes and opens the menu with tick symbols, for
E
correction of the changes or to make other changes.
NOTE: if the changes are confirmed:
• The Menu page is opened.

• For approximately 3 seconds, the message “Parameters updated” appears.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
9 - Touch protections
Presentation Touch protections are available in all models of releases of the Ekip Touch range.
The presence of each individual protection depends on the version of the release, as specified
in the following paragraphs.
List of protections
The following is a list of the Touch protections:
Symbol Protection against

L Overload with inverse long-time delay
S Selective short-circuit
I Instantaneous short-circuit
G Earth fault with adjustable delay
MCR Instantaneous short-circuit on closing of the circuit-breaker
IU Current unbalancing
Hardware trip Internal circuit-breaker connection error
Harmonic Distortion Distorted wave forms
Current thresholds Thresholds for programmable signals
T Temperature outside range
Neutral Different protection of the Neutral line
The releases of the Emax 2 series also guarantee a non-adjustable fixed protection against
instantaneous short-circuit at high currents, called Iinst.
Operating principle
The protections include a series of parameters that allow the user to adjust the activation
thresholds and the tripping times of the circuit-breaker.
The operating principle of all the protections is similar: if the current exceeds the set protection
threshold, the specific protection will enter the alarm condition and will begin to delay.
The duration of the delay depends on the threshold and time parameters set, and depending
on the dynamic of the current we can have two behaviours:
• If the alarm condition persists, the release opens the circuit-breaker.
• If the current drops below the protection threshold, the release exits from the alarm
condition, interrupts the delay and doesn't open the circuit-breaker.
The protection thresholds refer to the rated current of the rating plug (In).
IMPORTANT:
• To manage tripping of the circuit-breaker with a specific protection, the

protection itself must be enabled and, if supported, must have the trip
enable parameter activated.
• All the protections have a default configuration: in the event of activation,
check the parameters and make changes according to the requirements
of your installation.
84 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 9 - Touch protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
L Protection
Path
Main page - Menus - Protections
t Function
I1 L The protection L protects against overloads
NOTE: the protection is available and active for all the versions of the release. You
can disable the protection by configuring the release with rating plug L = Off.
t1
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips in a time that decreases as the
current read increases.
I Parameters
The following is a description of the parameters:
It determines the dynamic of the curve and the calculation of the
tripping time, conforming to various reference standards:
• t=k/i 2 according to IEC 60947-2.
• IEC 60255-3 SI.
• IEC 60255-3 VI.
• IEC 60255-3 EI.
• t=k/i 4 according to 60255-3.
Function
Each function corresponds to a mathematical expression that allows
the tripping time to be calculated. The details of the expressions are
IMPORTANT: if from the calculation the tripping time turns

out to be less than 1 second, it is automatically limited to 1
second.
It is represented both as an absolute value (Ampere) and as a relative
value (In, nominal value defined by the Rating Plug).
Threshold (I1)
IMPORTANT: the protection is activated and starts timing
for currents between 1.05 and 1.2 of the I1 threshold set.
Example (with I1 set = 400 A): the protection is activate for
currents read between 420 A and 480 A.
The value T1 contributes in calculating the tripping time (in reference to
the curve, T1 affects the entire curve shifting it along the vertical axis).
Time (t1)
IMPORTANT: the parameter is used if the selected function
is t=k/i 2.
The prealarm of L allows notification that the measured current is near
the activation threshold of the protection.
The prealarm state is activated for currents higher than a threshold that
Prealarm I1
can be set by the user, and is deactivated in two cases:
• Current lower than the prealarm threshold.
• Current higher than the protection activation threshold.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection S
Path
t Function
I2 S The protection S protects against the selective short circuit.
NOTE: the protection is available for LSI and LSIG versions of the release.
t2 When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed or dynamic time
Parameters
I
Enabling Activates/deactivates the protection.
• t=k (ANSI 50TD): fixed time trip.
• t=k / i 2 (ANSI 51): inverse time dynamic tripping.
The calculation of the tripping time of the inverse time curve is based
Function on a mathematical expression. The details are provided in the table on
page 94.

is automatically limited to t2.
reference to the above curve, it is the part of the curve parallel to the
ordinate).
Threshold (I2)
I1 threshold. An incorrect configuration returns an error on
the display and the programming session doesn’t conclude,
with consequent rejection of the changes made to the
parameters.
• t=k: t2 is the delay time between the exceeding of the I2 threshold
and the sending of the opening command.
Time (t2)
• t=k / i 2: t2 contributes in calculating the tripping time (in reference to
the above curve, t2 affects the entire curve, moving it as a whole along
the vertical axis).
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection I
Path
t Function
I3 I The protection I protects against instantaneous short circuit.
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed time. The user
can set the activation threshold.
Parameters

I Parameter Description
Activates/deactivates the protection.
Enabling
IMPORTANT: it can be only activated if the MCR protection
is Off.
It defines the current value that if exceeded activates the protection
(in reference to the curve, it is the part of the curve parallel to the
ordinate).
Threshold (I3)
I2 threshold. An incorrect configuration returns an error on
the display and the programming session doesn’t conclude,
with consequent rejection of the changes made to the
parameters.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection G
Path
t Function
I4 G The protection G protects against an earth fault.
NOTE:
t4 • The protection is available for the LSIG version of the release.

• With Ekip Touch, Ekip Hi-Touch and Ekip G Touch releases, if the protection is
activated the presence of the Gext sensor has been selected, it is possible to
adjust the protection in the Advanced section, under the Gext item. With Ekip G
I Hi-Touch both the G and the Gext items are available, in the respective sections.
Parameters
If enabled, the protection is inhibited automatically by the release in two
conditions:
• Disconnection of one or more current sensors.
• Current measured on one of the phases is higher than a maximum
value.
Enabling
IMPORTANT: the maximum current value that deactivates
protection G varies according to the threshold set:
• 8 In (with I4 ≥ 0.8 In).
• 6 In (with 0.5 In ≤ I4 < 0.8 In).
• 4 In (with 0.2 In ≤ I4 < 0.5 In).
• 2 In (with I4 < 0.2 In).
• t=k (ANSI 50NTD): fixed time trip.
• t=k/i 2 (ANSI 51N): inverse time dynamic tripping.
The calculation of the tripping time of the inverse time curve is based
Function on a mathematical expression. The details are provided in the table on
page 94.
IMPORTANT: The minimum tripping time of the protection

is t4. If according to the calculation the tripping time is less,
it is automatically limited to t4.
Threshold (I4) reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the ordinate).
• t=k: t4 is the delay time between the exceeding of the I4 threshold
Time (t4) and the sending of the opening command.
• t=k/i 4: t4 contributes in calculating the tripping time (in reference to
the curve, t2 affects the entire curve, moving it along the vertical axis).
The protection G has Trip Enable, Zone Selectivity, Startup Enable, see page 93.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
MCR Protection
Path
Main page - Menu - Advanced protections
t Function
I3 MCR
The MCR protection has the same characteristics as the protection I, with some variations:
• It acts only within an interval calculated from the closing of the circuit-breaker.
• It only works with auxiliary power supply or Ekip Measuring Pro module (with voltage
sockets energized).
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed non-adjustable
time. The user can set the activation threshold.
I Parameters
Enabling
IMPORTANT: it can be only activated if the protection is
deactivated.
Threshold (I3) ordinate).
It defines the time interval for which the protection is active, starting
Trip Time
from the closing of the circuit-breaker.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
IU Protection
Path
t Function
I6 IU The protection IU protects against an imbalance between the currents of the individual phases
protected by the circuit-breaker.
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed time.
t6 Parameters

I Parameter Description
Threshold (I6)
ordinate).
It is represented as a percentage value of 1 In
The delay time between the exceeding of the I6 threshold and the
Time (t6) sending of the opening command (in reference to the curve t6, it affects
the entire curve, moving it along the vertical axis).
Hardware trip
Path
Main page - Menus - Settings - Circuit-breaker
Function
The Hardware trip protection protects against internal connection errors in the circuit-breaker.
If enabled, the fault is signalled and an opening command is sent if one or more of the following
events is detected:
• Current sensors disconnected (phase or external if enabled).
• Rating Plug disconnected.
• Trip Coil disconnected (only signalling).
• Incompatibility between protection release and mainboard.
• Internal problems with the release.
IMPORTANT: the protection trips if the error conditions persist more than 1
second.
Harmonic distortion
Path
Main page - Menus - Measurements
Function
The Harmonic Distortion protection allows a control alarm to be activated for a distorted wave
form.
If enabled, an alarm is activated for peak factors higher than 2.1.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Current thresholds
Path
Function
The Current Thresholds allow controls to be set on the current lines, to be connected to the
programmable contacts of the Ekip Signalling modules (in all versions). 2 pairs of contacts are
available:
• Threshold 1 and Threshold 2, with control referring to I1.
• Threshold Iw1 and Threshold Iw2, with control referring to In.
IMPORTANT:
• The current thresholds do not manage the trip, but only the signal.
• The function is active if the release is energized by an auxiliary power
supply or Ekip Measuring Pro.
Parameters
It is possible to do the following:
Threshold 1 • Enable the function.
• Set the activation percentage value
Threshold 2 • Enable the function.
• Set the activation percentage value
• Enable the function.
Threshold Iw1
• Set the activation value.
• Set the direction.
• Enable the function.
Threshold Iw2
• Set the activation value.
• Set the direction.
NOTE: the thresholds Iw1 and Iw2 are expressed both as an absolute value (Ampere)
and a relative value (In, nominal value defined by Rating Plug).
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection T
Path
Function
The protection T protects the circuit-breaker against abnormal temperatures recorded by the
release.
It is always active, and has two states, according to the temperature read:
State Temperature Range Release actions

Warning -25 < t <-20 or 70 < t < 85 Display off; Warning LED on @ 0.5Hz.
Display off; Alarm and Warning LEDs
Alarm t <-25 or t>85 on @2Hz; Circuit beaker opening
command.
IMPORTANT: the opening command is sent only if the parameter Trip Enable
is ON.
The protection T has Trip Enable, see page 93.
Neutral
Path
Function
The purpose of the Neutral protection is to characterize the protections L, S and I on the
Neutral pole with a control factor different to the other phases.
IMPORTANT: the protection is available with four-pole circuit-breakers (4P)

or three-pole circuit-breakers with external neutral (3P+N).
Parameters
Enabling
NOTE: with a 4P circuit-breaker and neutral Off, the
measurement of the current is provide in any case.
Represented as a percentage; it defines the multiplication factor of
the neutral current, for calculating the activation threshold of the
protections:
• 50%: lowest tripping threshold (in reference to the curves of the
Neutral
threshold
• 100%.
• 150%.
• 200%: highest tripping threshold (in reference to the curves of the
Limitations
The adjustment of the Neutral threshold to values of 200% and 150% must be performed
considering the following formula: (I1 x InN) ≤ Iu
Where InN is the Neutral threshold set, and Iu the rated current of the circuit-breaker.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Iinst The purpose of this protection is to maintain the integrity of the circuit-breaker and installation in
the case of particularly high current values requiring shorter reaction times than those provided
by the instantaneous short-circuit-protection.
The protection cannot be disabled, and the tripping threshold and time are defined by ABB.
Additional functions
Functions
For some protections there are functions available that extend the functionality:
Protection L S I G IU T
Thermal memory x x
Trip Enable x x x x
Zone selectivity x x
Startup Enable x x x
Thermal Memory
This function reduces the tripping time of the protection based on the time elapsed between
multiple trips caused by heating of the cables.
IMPORTANT: the parameter can be activated if the function of the selected

protection is t=k/i 2.
Trip Enable
Disables the trip command, in order to use the protection as an alarm signal, without any
opening commands.
Zone Selectivity
The function allows multiple circuit-breakers belonging to the same installation to be connected
together, in order to coordinate the releases and to reduce the tripping times in the case of
protections S and G.
The function allows circuit-breakers to be coordinated so that, in the event of a failure:
• The circuit-breaker closest to the fault trips.
• The other circuit-breakers are locked for a programmable time.
Startup Enable
The function allows you to modify the threshold of the protection for a period that can be set
by the user. The period is activated when a threshold is exceeded (Startup Threshold), which
can be programmed by the user via Ekip Connect software.
IMPORTANT:
• Startup can be activated with a fixed time protection function (t=k).

• The I3 startup threshold must be higher than the I2 startup threshold.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Summary table of Basic protections
Threshold Calculation Example

ABB ANSI (9) Threshold Time Tolerance t t (3)
tolerance (3) formula t t (2) calculation t t (2)
activation for t t = 6.75 s
L I1 = 0.4…1 In If in the range t1 = 3…144 s tt = with: ± 10 % with If ≤ 6 In
49
(60947-2) step = 0.001 In (1.05...1.2) step = 1 s (9 t1) / (If / I1) 2 I1 = 0.4 In; t1 = ± 20 % with If > 6 In
x I1 3 s; If = 0.8 In
activation for
tt =
L I1 = 0.4…1 In If in the range t1 = 3…144 s see the table ± 10 % with If ≤ 6 In
49 (t1 x a x b) /
(60255-3) (1) step = 0.001 In (1.05...1.2) step = 1 s below ± 20 % with If > 6 In
((If / I1) k-a)
x I1
± 7% with I2
t2 = 0.05…0.8 The better of the
S I2 = 0.6...10 In ≤ 6 In
50 TD s t t = t2 - two values:
(t=k) step = 0.1 In ± 10% with I2
step = 0.01 s ± 10 % or ± 40 ms
> 6 In
± 7% with I2
t2 = 0.05…0.8 t t = 5 s con:
S I2 = 0.6...10 In ≤ 6 In tt = ± 15 % with If ≤ 6 In
51 s I2 = 1 In; t2 =
(t=k / I 2) step = 0.1 In ± 10% with I2 (100 t2) / (If) 2 ± 20 % with If > 6 In
step = 0.01 s 0.8 s; If = 4 In
> 6 In
I3 = 1.5...15 In
I 50 ± 10 % Not adjustable t t ≤ 30 ms - -
step = 0.1 In
The better of the
G 50N I4 (4)= 0,1...1 In t4 = 0…1 s two values:
±7% t t = t4 -
(t=k) TD step = 0.001 In step = 0.05 s ± 10 % or ± 40 ms
(8)
t t = 0.32 s
G I4 (4)= 0,1...1 In t4 = 0.1…1 s tt = with:
51N ±7% ± 15 %
(t=k / I 2) step = 0.001 In step = 0.05 s 2 / (If / I4) 2 I4 = 0.8 In; t4 =
0.2 s; If = 2 In
I3 = 1.5...15 In 40…500 ms (5)
MCR - ± 10 % t t ≤ 30 ms - -
step = 0.1 In step = 0.01 s
I6 = 2…90 % t6 = 0.5…60 s
IU 46 ± 10 % t t = t6 - -
step =1 % step= 0.5 s
Iinst - Defined by ABB - Instantaneous - - -
Current
50…100 % I1
thresholds - - - - - -
step = 1 %
(1 and 2)
Current
thresholds 0.3…10 In
- - - - - -
(Iw1 and step = 0.01 In
Iw2)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Continued from the previous page
The following are the details of the protections according to standard 60255-3:
Protection Curve Parameters Calculation formula t t (3) Example calculation t t (3)

L a = 0.14; b = 0.15873; tt = t t = 4.78 s with:
(60255-3 SI) k = 0.02 (t1 x a x b) / ((If / I1) k-1) I1 = 0.4 In; t1 = 3 s; If = 0.8 In
L a = 13.5; b = 0.148148; tt = t t = 6 s with:
(60255-3 VI) k=1 (t1 x a x b) / ((If / I1) k-1) I1 = 0.4 In; t1 = 3 s; If = 0.8 In
L a = 80; b = 0.1; tt = t t = 8 s with:
(60255-3 EI) k=2 (t1 x a x b) / ((If / I1) k-1) I1 = 0.4 In; t1 = 3 s; If = 0.8 In
L a = 80; b = 1; tt = t t = 16 s with:
(60255-3 I 4) k=4 (t1 x a x b) / ((If / I1) k-1) I1 = 0.4 In; t1 = 3 s; If = 0.8 In
Table of Additional Functions of the protections
The following table summarises the additional functions combined with protections S, I, G:
Calculation
Threshold tolerance
ABB Threshold (3) Time (7) formula Tolerance t t (3)
t t (3)
S I2 startup= 0.6...10 In ± 7 % with I2 ≤ 6 In t2 startup= 0.1…30 s The better of the two values:
t t = t2
(Startup) (6) step = 0.1 In ± 10 % with I2 > 6 In step = 0.01 s ± 10 % or ± 40 ms
I I3 startup= 1.5...15 In t3 startup= 0.1…30 s
± 10 % t t ≤ 30 ms -
(Startup) (6) step = 0.1 In step = 0.01 s
G I4 startup= 0.2...1 In t4 startup= 0.1…30 s The better of the two values:
±7% t t = t4
(Startup) (6) step = 0.02 In step = 0.01 s ± 10 % or ± 40 ms
S t2 SdZ = 0.04…0.2 s
- - - -
(SdZ) step = 0.01 s
G t4 SdZ = 0.04…0.2 s
- - - -
(SdZ) step= 0.01 s
NOTES
(1)
For details see the table with all curves defined by standard 60255-3 that can be selected by the user.
(2)
The calculation of t t is valid for values of If that have exceeded the activation threshold of the protection.
(3)
Valid tolerances with release energized in service conditions or with the auxiliary, tripping time ≥ 100 ms, temperature and currents within operating
limits. If the conditions are not guaranteed, the tolerances in the table that follows the notes.
(4)
In the presence of an auxiliary power supply all the thresholds are active. If the auxiliary power supply is not present, the minimum threshold is auto-
matically limited to the higher value between 100 A and 25 In
(5)
The MCR time is to be understood as the time for which the protection remains active after the circuit-breaker is closed. Tripping time, not adjusta-
ble, as for protection I.
(6)
Startup can be activated only with the function set to fixed time.
(7)
For the startup functions, the specified time is the period for which the protection with the different threshold remains active, calculated from when
the startup threshold is exceeded.
(8)
With t4 = 0 s, the maximum tolerance is 50 ms.
(9)
Protection Threshold Tolerance Tolerance t t
L activation for If in the range 1.05...1,2 I1 ± 20 %
S ± 10 % ± 20 %
I ± 15 % ≤ 60 ms
G ± 15 % ± 20 % (60 ms with t4 = 0)
Other - ± 20 %
ABB | SACE Emax 2
10 - Measuring Pro protections
Presentation The Measuring Pro protections are available in all versions of releases of the Touch range that
have an Ekip Measuring Pro module.
List of protections
The following is a list of the Measuring Pro protections:

UV Minimum voltage
OV Maximum voltage
VU Voltage unbalancing
UF Minimum frequency
OF Maximum frequency
RP Reverse active power
Phase Sequence Phase sequence error
Cos φ Power factor error
If the Ekip Measuring Pro module and the Ekip Synchrocheck module are present, a further
selection is activated:
Symbol Function
Synchronism between two independent
Synchrocheck
power supply systems
Operating principle
The operating principle of all the protections is similar: if the voltage, frequency or power signal
exceeds the set protection threshold, the specific protection will enter the alarm condition and
will begin to delay.
on the dynamic of the signal we can have two behaviours:
• If the signal drops below the protection threshold, the release exits from the alarm condition,
interrupts the delay and doesn't open the circuit-breaker.
The protection thresholds are distinguished by type:
• The voltage protections are related to the rated size of the voltage set on the release (Un).
• The frequency protections are related to the frequency set on the release (fn).
• the power protections refer to the product between current and rated voltage (Sn = √3
* In * Un).
IMPORTANT:

96 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 10 - Measuring Pro protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection UV
Path
t Function
UV The UV protection trips when the phase voltage drops below the set threshold.
U8
If the voltage of at least one phase drops below the activation threshold, the protection trips
within a fixed time set by the user.
t8
Parameters

v Parameter Description
Defines the voltage value below which the protection is activated
(in reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the ordinate).
Threshold (U8)
It is represented both as an absolute value (Volts) and a relative
value (Vn, nominal value defined on the release).
The delay time between the exceeding of the U8 threshold and the
Time (t8) sending of the opening command (in reference to the curve, it is
the part parallel to the abscissa).
Protection UV has Trip Enable, see page 93.
Protection OV
Path
t Function
U9 OV The OV protection trips when the phase voltage rises above the set threshold.
If the voltage of at least one phase rises above the activation threshold, the protection trips
within a fixed time set by the user.
t9 Parameters
V Parameter Description
Defines the voltage value above which the protection is activated
Threshold (U9)
The delay time between the exceeding of the U9 threshold and the
Protection OV has Trip Enable, see page 93.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection VU
Path
t Function
U14 VU The protection VU protects against an imbalance between the voltages of the individual phases
protected by the circuit-breaker.
When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed time, set by the
user.
t14
Parameters

V
Threshold (U14) (in reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the ordinate).
It is represented as a percentage value of 1 In
The delay time between the exceeding of the U14 threshold and
Time (t14) the sending of the opening command (in reference to the curve, it
is the part parallel to the abscissa).
Protection VU has Trip Enable, see page 93.
Protection UF
Path
t Function
UF
The UF protection trips when line frequency drops below the set threshold.
f12
If the line frequency drops below the activation threshold, the protection trips within a fixed
time set by the user.
t12
Parameters

f Parameter Description
Defines the frequency value below which the protection is activated
Threshold (f12)
It is represented both as an absolute value (Hertz) and a relative
value (Fn, nominal value defined on the release).
The delay time between the exceeding of the f12 threshold and the
Protection UF has Trip Enable, see page 93.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection OF
Path
t Function
f13 OF The OF protection trips when the line frequency rises above the set threshold.
If the line frequency rises above the activation threshold, the protection trips within a fixed time
set by the user.
t13 Parameters

f Parameter Description
Defines the frequency value above which the protection is
activated (in reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the
Threshold (f13) ordinate).
Protection OF has Trip Enable, see page 93.
Protection RP
Path
t Function
RP P11
Protection RP trips when the total reverse active power exceeds the reverse active power
threshold set.
When the total reverse active power rises above the set threshold, the protection delays for the
t11 set time t11 and then opens.
Parameters
P The following is a description of the parameters:
Defines the power value for which the protection is activated (in
It is represented both as an absolute value (kW) and as a relative
value (Sn, calculated considering the rated voltage and current set
Threshold (P11)
on the release: Sn = √3 * Vn * In).
NOTE: the threshold expressed in Sn is preceded by the

sign “- “ in order to indicate that it refers to reverse power.
The delay time between the exceeding of the p11 threshold and
Protection RP has Trip Enable, see page 93.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Phase Sequence
Path
Main page - Menus - Advanced protections - Signallings
Function
The Phase Sequence protection trips when the sequence of the voltages is not aligned with
the sequence set by the user.
Parameters
Threshold It defines the voltage control sequence.
Cos φ
Path
Main page - Menus - Advanced protections - Signallings
Function
The protection Cos φ trips when the total cos φ value drops below the threshold set.
NOTE: the total cos φ is calculated considering Total active power and Total apparent
power.
Parameters
It defines the value of cos φ below which the protection is
Threshold
activated
Synchrocheck
Path
Function
The Synchrocheck module recognizes and signals if the synchronism conditions exist
between two independent voltage sources (example: generator + network) for closing of the
interconnection circuit-breaker.
NOTE:
• The Synchrocheck functions are activated only in the presence of the Ekip
Synchrocheck module.
• All the operating specifications are described in the paragraph that describes the
Synchrocheck module, on page 171.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Summary table of Measuring Pro protections
Tolerance Calculation
threshold formula t t (1)
U8 = 0.5….0.98 Un t8 = 0.05…60 s The better of the two values:
UV 27 ±5% t t = t8
Step = 0.001 Un step = 0.05 s ± 10% or ± 40 ms
U9 = 1.02….1.5 Un t9 = 0.05…60 s The better of the two values:
OV 59 ±5% t t = t9
Step = 0.001 Un step = 0.05 s ± 10% or ± 40 ms
U14 = 2…90 % t14 = 0.5…60 s The better of the two values:
VU 47 ± 10 % t t = t14
Step = 1 % step = 0.5 s ± 10% or ± 40 ms
f12 = 0.9….0.99 fn t12 = 0.2…60 s The better of the two values:
UF 81L ±5% t t = t12
Step = 0.01 fn step = 0.1 s ± 10% or ± 40 ms
f13 = 1.01….1.1 fn t13 = 0.5…60s The better of the two values:
OF 81H ±5% t t = t13
Step = 0.01 fn step = 0.01 s ± 10% or ± 40 ms
P11 = -1…-0.08 Sn t11 = 0.5…100 s The better of the two values:
RP 32R ± 10 % t t = t11
Step = 0.001 Sn step = 0.1 s ± 10% or ± 40 ms
Ulive = 0.5…1.1 Un;
Step = 0.01 Un
∆U = 0.02…0.12 Un;
Step = 0.01 Un
∆f = 0.1…1 Hz; Step = tref = 0.1…30 s
Synchrocheck 25 ± 10 % - -
0.1 Hz step = 0.1 s
∆Cos φ = 5…50° elt;
Step = 5° elt
tsyn = 0.1…3 s; Step
= 0.1 s
Cyclic
direction of 47 1-2-3 or 3-2-1 - - - -
the phases
Cos φ = 0.2…0.95
Cos φ 78 - - - -
Step = 0.01
(1)
The calculation of t t is valid for values that have exceeded the activation threshold of the protection.
(2)
Valid tolerances with release energized in service conditions or with the auxiliary, tripping time = 100 ms, temperature and currents within operating
limits. If the conditions are not guaranteed, the tolerance of the tripping time becomes ± 20%.
(3)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
11 - Hi-Touch protections
Presentation Hi-Touch protections are available for Ekip Hi-Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch releases.
List of protections
The following is a list of the Hi-Touch protections:

S2 Short-circuit with adjustable delay
D Directional short-circuit with adjustable delay
UV2 Minimum voltage
OV2 Maximum voltage
UF2 Minimum frequency
OF2 Maximum frequency
Set A-B Double configuration of the protections
Harmonic
Harmonic distortion
Distortion
Operating principle
The operating principle of all the protections is similar: if the current, voltage or frequency signal
exceeds the set protection threshold, the specific protection will enter the alarm condition and
will begin to delay.
• The current protections are related to the rated size of the rating plug (In).
• The voltage protections are related to the rated size of the voltage set on the release (Un).
• The frequency protections are related to the frequency set on the release (fn).
IMPORTANT:

102 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 11 - Hi-Touch protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection S2
Path
t Function
I5 S2 The protection S2:
• It protects against a selective short circuit, as for the function S.
• This is independent of protection S: dual protection of type S allows you to widen the level
of protection against a selective short circuit.
t5 When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed time. The user
can set the activation threshold and the tripping time.
I Parameters
(in reference to the above curve, it is the part of the curve parallel
to the ordinate).
It is represented both as an absolute value (Ampere) and as a
relative value (In, nominal value defined by the Rating Plug).
Threshold (I5)
IMPORTANT: The I5 threshold set must be higher than
the I1 threshold. An incorrect configuration returns
an error on the display and the programming session
doesn’t conclude, with consequent rejection of the
changes made to the parameters.
This is the delay time between the exceeding of the I5 threshold
Time (t5)
and the sending of the opening command
Protection S2 has Trip Enable, Zone Selectivity, Startup Enable, see page 109.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
D Protection
Path
t Function
I7 D Protection D protects against selective directional short circuit.
t7bw Depending on the detected direction of the current, the tripping time can be different.
NOTE: the current direction is compared with the direction of the flow of power that
t7fw is set on the release. The flow of power parameter is described in the paragraph that
describes the Ekip Measuring Pro module, on page 164.
I When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed time determined
by the direction of the failure.
Parameters
It is possible to modify various parameters:
Threshold (I7)
It is represented both as an absolute value (Ampere) and as a
relative value (In, nominal value defined by the Rating Plug)
It is considered in two conditions:
Time (t7fw) • Current direction detected: high → low (with flow of power set:
high → low).
• Current direction detected: low → high (with flow of power set:
low → high).
It is considered in two conditions:
Time (t7bw) • Current direction detected: high → low (with flow of power set:
low → high).
• Current direction detected: low → high (with flow of power set:
high → low).
Protection D has Directional Zone Selectivity, Startup Enable, see page 109.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection UV2
Path
t Function
UV2
The protection UV2:
U15 • Trips when the phase voltage drops below the set threshold, like the protection UV.
• It is independent from the UV protection: dual protection of type UV allows you to widen
the level of protection against the voltage drops.
t15
If the voltage of a phase drops below the activation threshold, the protection trips within a fixed
v Parameters
Defines the voltage value below which the protection is activated
Threshold (U15)
Protection UV2 has Trip Enable, see page 109.
Protection OV2
Path
t Function
U16 OV2 Protection OV2:

• Trips when the phase voltage rises above the set threshold, like the protection OV.
• It is independent from the OV protection: dual protection of type OV allows you to widen
the level of protection against the voltage peaks.
t16 If the voltage of a phase rises above the activation threshold, the protection trips within a fixed
V Parameters
Defines the voltage value above which the protection is activated
Threshold (U16)
Protection OV2 has Trip Enable, see page 109.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection UF2
Path
t Function
UF2
Protection UF:
f17 • Trips when the line frequency drops below the set threshold, like the protection UF.
• It is independent from the UF protection: dual protection of type UF allows you to widen
the level of protection against drops in frequency.
t17
If the line frequency drops below the activation threshold, the protection trips within a fixed
f Parameters
Defines the frequency value below which the protection is activated
Threshold (f17)
Protection UF2 has Trip Enable, see page 109.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection OF2
Path
t Function
f18 OF2 Protection OF2:
• Trips when the line frequency rises above the set threshold, like the protection OF.
• It is independent from the OF protection: dual protection of type OF allows you to widen
the level of protection against frequency peaks.
t18 If the line frequency rises above the activation threshold, the protection trips within a fixed time
set by the user.
f Parameters
Defines the frequency value above which the protection is
Threshold (f18) ordinate).
Protection OF2 has Trip Enable, see page 109.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Set A-B
Path
Main page - Menus - Settings - Dual Set
Function
Enabling the function Set A-B allows you to activate two different protection configurations,
one alternative to the other.
The priority and the activation of the protection set is associated to various programmable
events and parameters.
Parameters
NOTE: Enabling changes the structure of the Protections

and Advanced Protections menus: after it is accessed, an
Enabling intermediate page appears for selecting the reference set (Set
A and Set B).
Enabling activates an icon in the Histograms page,
representing the Set in use. For details refer to the paragraph that
describes the Histograms page, on page 61.
Default Set Defines the main and secondary protection sets.
If activated it has two conditions:
• the main set is active if the position of the circuit-breaker (open
CB Closing Dual or closed) has been stable for a duration greater than the value set
Set for “CB closing time”.
• the secondary set is active at the change of state of the circuit-
breaker, for a duration defined by the parameter “CB closing time”.
This option is active if the parameter “CB Closing Dual Set” is
activated.
CB closing time
It defines the time for which the alternative set is active, starting
from the circuit-breaker change of state (from Open to Closed).
If activated it has two conditions:
• in the presence of auxiliary power supply by Ekip Supply
Dual Set with Vaux modules, the main set is active.
• in the absence of auxiliary power supply by Ekip Supply
modules, the alternative set is active.
Harmonic Distortion
Path
Function
The Harmonic Distortion protection checks the level of harmonic distortion of the currents.
A maximum peak factor greater than 2.1 is signalled on the display as a fault.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Additional Hi functions
Functions
For some protections there are functions available that extend the functionality:
Protection S2 D UV2 OV2 UF2 OF2

Trip Enable x x x x x
Zone selectivity x
Startup Enable x x
Directional zone selectivity x
Trip Enable
Disables the trip command, in order to use the protection as an alarm signal, without any
opening commands.
Zone Selectivity
The function allows multiple circuit-breakers belonging to the same installation to be connected
together, in order to coordinate the releases and to reduce the tripping times in the case of
protection S2.
The function allows circuit-breakers to be coordinated so that, in the event of a failure:
• the circuit-breaker closest to the fault trips.
• the other circuit-breakers are locked for a programmable time.
For greater details see the programmer manual.
Startup Enable
The function allows you to modify the threshold of the protection for a period that can be set
by the user. The period is activated when a threshold is exceeded (Startup Threshold), which
can be programmed by the user via Ekip Connect software.
Directional Zone Selectivity
The function allows, as with zone selectivity, multiple circuit-breakers belonging to the same
installation to be connected together, in order to coordinate the releases and reduce tripping
times, but with some important differences:
• It is to be used in installations with a ring circuit.
• It allows tripping to be managed and coordinated according to the power flows (determined
by the direction of the current), in order to minimise dispersion of energy.
NOTE: Directional Zone Selectivity works as an alternative to S and G zone selectivity.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Summary table of Hi-Touch protections
The better of the two
I5 = 0.6...10 In ± 7 % I5 ≤ 6 In t5 = 0.05...0.8 s
S2 50 TD t t = t5 values:
Step = 0.1 In ± 10 % I5 > 6 In step = 0.01 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
I7 = 0.6...10 In ± 7 % I7 ≤ 6 In t7 = 0.2...0.8 s
D 67 t t = t7 values:
Step = 0.1 In ± 10 % I7 > 6 In step = 0.01 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
U15= 0.5….0.98 Un t15 = 0.05…60 s
UV2 27 ±5% t t = t15 values:
Step = 0.001 Un step = 0.05 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
U16= 1.02….1.5 Un t16 = 0.05…60 s
OV2 59 ±5% t t = t16 values:
Step = 0.001 Un step = 0.05 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
f17= 0.9….0.99 fn t17 = 0.2…60 s
UF2 81L ±5% t t = t17 values:
Step = 0.01 fn step = 0.1 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
f18= 1.01….1.1 fn t18 = 0.5…60 s
OF2 81H ±5% t t = t18 values:
Step = 0.01 fn step = 0.01 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
The following table summarises the additional functions combined with protections S2 and D:
Threshold tolerance Calculation

ABB Threshold Time (3) Tolerance t t (2)
(2)
formula t t (1)
S2 I5 startup= 0.6...10 In ± 7 % with I5 ≤ 6 In t5 startup= 0.1…30 s The better of the two values:
t t = t5 startup
(Startup) step = 0.1 In ± 10 % with I5 > 6 In step = 0.01 s ± 10 % or ± 40 ms
D I7 startup= 0.6...10 In t7 startup= 0.1…30 s The better of the two values:
± 10 % t t = t7 startup
(Startup) step = 0.1 In step = 0.01 s ± 10 % or ± 40 ms
D t7 SdZ = 0.13…0.5 s
- - - -
(SdZ) step = 0.01 s
(1)
(2)
(3)
For the startup functions, the specified time is the period for which the protection with the different threshold remains active, calculated from when
the startup threshold is exceeded.
(4)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
12 - G Touch protections
Presentation G Touch protections are available in all the versions of releases of the Generators range (Ekip
G Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch).
List of protections
The following is a list of the G Touch protections:

S(V) Voltage control short-circuit
RV Residual voltage
RQ Reversal of reactive power
OQ Maximum reactive power
OP Maximum active power
UP Minimum active power
Operating principle
The operating principle of all the protections is similar: if the voltage or power signal exceeds
the set protection threshold, the specific protection will enter the alarm condition and will begin
to delay.
• The voltage protections are related to the rated size of the voltage set on the release (Vn).
* In * Vn).
IMPORTANT:

111 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 12 - G Touch protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
S(V) Protection
Path
t Function
I20 S(V)
The protection S(V) protects against short circuits, with a threshold sensitive to the value of
the voltage.
The I20 threshold, as a result of a voltage drop, decreases in steps or in linear fashion,
according to two different modes:
t20
• Step Mode provides for variation in steps according to the Ul parameter.
• Linear Mode provides for dynamic variation base on the parameters Ul and Uh.
I I20 I20
I20 I20
Ks x I20 Ks x I20
UI Uh
Ul V V
Parameters
Defines the variation dynamic of the current threshold, as represented
Curves
in the two diagrams above.
Current reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the ordinate).
Threshold (I20) It is represented both as an absolute value (Ampere) and as a relative
With the curve in step mode, it is the threshold that determines the
variation in the level of I20:
UI Threshold • With voltage ≥ Ul, the tripping threshold is I20.
(Step) • With voltage < Ul, the tripping threshold is Ks * I20.
It is represented both as an absolute value (Volts) and as a percentage
(of Vn, a nominal value defined on the release).
With the curve in linear mode, it is the threshold that determines the
variation in the level of I20:
Uh and UI • With voltage ≥ Uh, the tripping threshold is I20.
threshold • With voltage < Uh and > Ul, the tripping threshold changes gradually.
(Linear) • With voltage ≤ Ul, the tripping threshold is Ks * I20
Constant for calculation of the variation of the I20 threshold. To be
Ks threshold
applied in different ways according to the type curve selected.
(determined by the voltage value read) and the sending of the opening
Time (t20)
command (in reference to the curve, t20 affects the entire curve,
moving it along the vertical axis).
The protection S (V) has Trip Enable, see page 93.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection RV
Path
t Function
U22 RV The protection RV protects against loss of insulation (residual voltage).
NOTE: the protection is activated and available for four-pole circuit-breakers or three-
pole circuit-breakers equipped with an external Neutral.
t22
When the residual voltage exceeds the activation threshold U22, the protection trips within a
fixed time t22.
V Parameters
It defines the voltage value that if exceeded activates the
protection (in reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the
Threshold (U22) ordinate).
This is the delay time between the exceeding of the U22 threshold
(determined by the voltage value read) and the sending of the
Time (t22)
opening command (in reference to the curve, t22 affects the entire
curve, moving it along the vertical axis).
Protection RV has Trip Enable, see page 93.
Protection RQ
Path
t Function
RQ
The protection RQ protects against the reversal of reactive power, with an adjustable threshold
Q24; Q25; Kq; Kq2 according to the parameter Sn (= √3 x Vn x In).
When the reverse reactive power drops below activation threshold Q24, the protection trips
t24 within a fixed time t24.
Adjustment of the constant Kq allows you to vary the tripping threshold of the protection: with
Kq = 0 the threshold is constant, while with Kq different to 0 the threshold has a slope, as
Q24; Q25; Kq; Kq2 illustrated in the following image.
TRIP
Parameters
Threshold (Kq) It defines the course (slope) of the protection function.
It defines the starting point on the Q axis of the protection curve.
It is represented both as an absolute value (kVAR) and a relative
value (Sn, referring to the rated voltage set on the release).
Threshold (Q24)
NOTES: the threshold expressed in Sn is preceded by the
This is the delay time between the exceeding of the tripping
Time (t24)
threshold and the sending of the opening command
Protection RQ has Trip Enable, see page 93.
Protection OQ
Path
t Function
Q27 OQ The protection OQ trips when the power supplied rises above the set threshold.
If the reactive power rises above the activation threshold, the protection trips within a fixed time
set by the user.
t27 Parameters

Q Parameter Description
Defines the reactive power value above which the protection is
Threshold (Q27) ordinate).
The delay time between the exceeding of the Q27 threshold and
Protection OQ has Trip Enable, see page 93.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection OP
Path
t Function
P26 OP The protection OP trips when the active supplied rises above the set threshold.
If the active power rises above the activation threshold, the protection trips within a fixed time
set by the user.
t26 Parameters

P Parameter Description
Defines the active power value above which the protection is
Threshold (P26) ordinate).
It is represented both as an absolute value (kW) and a relative
The delay time between the exceeding of the P26 threshold and
Protection OP has Trip Enable, see page 93.
Protection UP
Path
t Function
UP
The protection UP trips when the power supplied drops below the set threshold.
U23
If the active power drops below the activation threshold, the protection trips within a fixed time
set by the user.
t23 Parameters

P Parameter Description
Defines the active power value below which the protection is
Threshold (P23) ordinate).
It is represented both as an absolute value (kW) and a relative
value (Sn, nominal value defined on the release).
The delay time between the exceeding of the P23 threshold and
Protection UP has Trip Enable and Startup Enable , see page 93.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Summary table for G Touch protections
ABB ANSI (5) Threshold Tripping time Tolerance t t (3)
I20 = 0.6...10 In; Step = 0.1 In The better of the
S(V) t20 = 0.05…30 s
51V Ul = 0.2…1 Un; Step = 0.01 Un ± 10 % t t = t20 two values:
(Step) Step = 0.01 s
Ks = 0.1…1; Step = 0.01 ± 10% or ± 40 ms
I20 = 0.6...10 In; Step = 0.1 In
The better of the
S(V) Ul = 0.2…1 Un; Step = 0.01 Un t20 = 0.05…30 s
51V ± 10 % t t = t20 (4) two values:
(Linear) Uh = 0.2…1 Un; Step = 0.01 Un Step = 0.01 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
Ks = 0.1…1; Step = 0.01
The better of the
U22 = 0.1….0.5 Un t22 = 0.5…60 s
RV 59N ±5% t t = t22 two values:
Step = 0.001 Un Step = 0.05 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
Q24 = -1…-0.1 Sn; Step = 0.001 The better of the
t24 = 0.5…100 s
RQ 40/32R Sn ± 10 % t t = t24 two values:
Step = 0.1 s
Kq = -2…2; Step = 0.01 ± 10% or ± 40 ms
The better of the
P26 = 0.4…2 Sn t26 = 0.5…100 s
OP 32OF ± 10 % t t = t26 two values:
Step = 0.001 Sn Step = 0.5 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
The better of the
Q27 = 0.4…2 Sn t27 = 0.5…100 s
OQ 32OF ± 10 % t t = t27 two values:
Step = 0.001 Sn Step = 0.5 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
The better of the
P23 = 0.1...1 Sn t23 = 0.5…100 s
UP 32LF ± 10 % t t = t23 two values:
Step = 0.001 Sn Step = 0.5 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
Protection UP has Startup Enable:
ABB Time (4)

t23 startup= 0.1…30 s
UP(Startup)
step = 0.01 s
Notes
(1)
(2)
(3)
The tripping threshold of the current for voltage values between Ul and Uh is calculated by performing the linear interpolation between the th-
resholds Uh and I20 (first point on the line) and Ul and Ks * I20 (second point on the line). Ithreshold = [(I20 * Ks *I20) / (Uh * Ul)] / (Umeasured * Uh) + I20.
(4)
The startup of protection UP is to be considered as the temporary deactivation time of the protection, starting from the exceeding of the startup
threshold.
(5)
ABB | SACE Emax 2
13 - G Hi-Touch protections
Presentation The G Hi-Touch protections are available with the Ekip G Hi-Touch release.
List of protections
The following is a list of the G Hi-Touch protections:

ROCOF Frequency derivation
S2(V) Voltage control short-circuit
RQ2 Reversal of reactive power
Operating principle
The operating principle of all the protections is similar: if the frequency or power signal exceeds
the set protection threshold, the specific protection will enter the alarm condition and will begin
to delay.
• The frequency protections are related to the rated size of the frequency set on the release
(Un).
* In * Un).
IMPORTANT:

117 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 13 - G Hi-Touch protections
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection ROCOF
Path
t Function
f28 ROCOF
The protection ROCOF protects against rapid frequency variations.
When the frequency variation exceeds the control threshold f28, the protection trips within a
fixed time t28.
t28 It is also possible to characterize the protection according to the way in which frequency varies
(increase or decrease), or to consider both conditions.
F f(Hz)
frequency
after failure
failure
50/60 Hz
frequency
after failure
Time
Figure 83
Parameters
It defines the maximum frequency variation allowed, which if
Threshold (f28) exceeded activates the protection.
It is represented as an absolute value (Hertz).
It defines whether the protection monitors increases, decreases, or
Trip Direction
both variations.
This is the delay time between the exceeding of the f28 threshold
Time (t28)
Protection ROCOF has Trip Enable, see page 93.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
S2(V) Protection
Path
t Function
I21 S2(V)
The protection S2 (V):
• Protects against short circuits, with a threshold sensitive to the value of the voltage.
• It is independent from the protection S (V): the dual protection allows you to widen the
level of protection against overload
t21 When the activation threshold I21 is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed time t21.
The I21 threshold, as a result of a voltage drop, decreases in steps or in linear fashion,
according to two different modes:
I
• Step Mode provides for variation in steps according to the Ul2 parameter.
• Linear Mode provides for dynamic variation base on the parameters Ul2 and Uh2.
I21 I21
I21 I21
Ks x I21 Ks x I21
Ul2 V Ul2 Uh2 V
Parameters
Defines the variation dynamic of the current threshold, as represented
Curves
in the two diagrams above.
Current reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the ordinate).
Threshold (I21) It is represented both as an absolute value (Ampere) and as a relative
With the curve in step mode, is the threshold that determines the
variation of the level of I21:
Threshold Ul2 • With voltage ≥ Ul2, the tripping threshold is I21.
(Step) • With voltage < Ul2, the tripping threshold is Ks * I21.
With the curve in linear mode, it is the threshold that determines the
variation of the level of I21:
• With voltage ≥ Uh2, the tripping threshold is I21.
Uh2 and Ul2
• With voltage < Uh2 and > Ul2, the tripping threshold changes
Threshold
gradually.
(Linear)
• With voltage ≤ Ul2, the tripping threshold is Ks * I21.
Constant for calculation of the variation of the I21 threshold. To be
Threshold Ks2
applied in different ways according to the type curve selected.
(determined by the voltage value read) and the sending of the opening
Time (t21)
command (in reference to the curve, t21 affects the entire curve,
moving it along the vertical axis).
The protection S2 (V) has Trip Enable, see page 93.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protection RQ2
Path
t Function
RQ2
Protection RQ2:
Q24; Q25; Kq; Kq2 • It protects against the reversal of reactive power, with an adjustable threshold according
to the active power value.
t24 • It is a variant of the RQ protection available with Ekip G Hi-Touch releases.
When the reverse reactive power drops below activation threshold, the protection trips within
a fixed time t24.
Q24; Q25; Kq; Kq2 The parameters Q24 and Q25, with the respective constants Kq and Kq2, allow you to
characterize the response curve with a dynamic behavior.
In particular, the adjustment of the constants Kq and Kq2 allows you to vary the tripping
threshold of the protection: with Kq and Kq2 = 0 the threshold is constant, while with Kq and
Kq2 different to 0 the threshold has a slope, as illustrated in the following image.
Q
kq2 kq
P
Q24 TRIP
Q25
Parameters
Threshold (Kq) It defines the course (slope) of the protection function.
Threshold (Kq2) It defines the course (slope) of the protection function.
Defines the reactive power value for which the protection is
activated.
Threshold (Q24) value (Sn, referring to the rated voltage set on the release).

Defines the reactive power value for which the protection is
activated.
Threshold (Q25) value (Sn, referring to the rated voltage set on the release).

This is the delay time between the exceeding of the tripping
Time (t24)
threshold and the sending of the opening command
Protection RQ2 has Trip Enable, see page 93.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Summary table of G Hi-Touch protections
Calculation
Tolerance
ABB ANSI (7) Threshold Tripping time formula Tolerance t t (2)
threshold
t t (1)
I21 = 0.6...10 In; Step = 0.1 In The better of the two
S2(V) t21 = 0.05…30 s
51V Ul2 = 0.2…1 Un; Step = 0.01 Un ± 10 % t t = t21 values:
(Step) Step = 0.01 s
Ks2 = 0.1…1; Step = 0.01 ± 10% or ± 40 ms
I21 = 0.6...10 In; Step = 0.1 In
S2(V) Ul2 = 0.2…1 Un; Step = 0.01 Un t21 = 0.05…30 s
51V ± 10 % t t = t21 (3) values:
(Linear) Uh2 = 0.2…1 Un; Step = 0.01 Un Step = 0.01 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
Ks2 = 0.1…1; Step = 0.01
Q24 = -1…-0.1 Sn; Step = 0.001 Sn
Q25 = -1…-0.1 Sn; Step = 0.001 Sn t24 = 0.5…100s
RQ2 (4) 40/32R ± 10 % t t = t24 values:
Kq = -2…2; Step = 0.01; Step = 0.1 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
Kq2 = -2…2; Step = 0.01
f28 = 0.4…10 Hz / s t28 = 0.15...10 s (5)
ROCOF 81R ± 10 % t t = t28 values:
Step = 0.2 Hz / s Step = 0.1 s
± 10% or ± 40 ms
Notes
(1)
(2)
(3)
The tripping threshold of the current for voltage values between Ul2 and Uh2 is calculated by performing the linear interpolation between the
thresholds Uh2 and I21 (first point on the line) and Ul2 and Ks2 * I20 (second point on the line). Ithreshold = [(I21 * Ks2 *I20) / (Uh2 * Ul2)] / (Umeasured *
Uh2) + I21.
(5)
The power of the activation threshold of the protection RQ2 is calculated by the intersection of the 2 straight lines composed of Q24 and Kq (Pth-
reshold
= Qmeasured * Kq + Q24) and from Q25 and Kq2 (Pthreshold = Qmeasured * Kq2 + Q25). If constants Kq and Kq2 are set to 0, the higher threshold
applies (considering that the values are negative, the applicable threshold is the one nearest to 0).
(6)
The parameter f28 limits the selectable minimum value of t28 as follows: 0.4 s (0.4 ≤ f28 < 1 Hz / s); 0.25 s (1.2 < f28 < 5 Hz / s); 0.15 s (f28 ≥
5.2 Hz / s).
(7) ANSI / IEEE C37-2 encoding.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
14 - Touch measurements
Presentation Touch measurements are available in all the models of releases of the Ekip Touch range.
The following is a list of the measurements:
Measurements Description
Instantaneous
Real Time measurements of the currents
currents
Trips List of the tripping for Basic protections
Events List of events, changes of state, alarms recorded by the release
History of the maximum currents recorded with an interval that can
Maximum current
be set
History of the minimum currents recorded with an interval that can
Minimum current
be set
Peak factor Real time measurement of the peak factor of the currents
Contact wear Calculation of the wear of the contacts
Datalogger Recording of the wave form of the currents and the digital states
Operation counters Number of mechanical and electrical operations
Instantaneous currents
Description
Instantaneous currents are real time measurements of earth fault and phase currents.
Representations and access pages
The current measurements are available in different representations, accessible from the
following pages:
• Histograms page: graphical representation in the form of a histogram of the phase
currents, and measurement in Amperes of the highest current.
• Measuring instruments page: graphical representation in the form of an ammeter and
measurement in Amperes of the highest current.
• Measurements page: measurements in Amperes of all the phase currents and earth
fault current.
NOTE:
• The measurement of the earth fault current is available only with LSIG versions of
releases.
• The measurements in Amperes are available from a minimum value of 0.03 In for
the phase currents, and 0.08 In for earth fault current. For lower currents “…” is
shown.
• In the Histograms page, the graphical representation of the currents is in relation
to 1 In, with a maximum value of 1.25 In
123 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 14 - Touch measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Trips
Path
Main page - Menus - Measurements - History
Description
The release is able to record the last 30 openings of the circuit-breaker (trips) caused by
protection trips.
The openings are correlated by the following information:
• The protection that tripped.
• The progressive number of the opening.
• The date and time of the opening (referring to the internal clock).
• The measurements associated to the trip protection.
NOTE:
• Each opening is associated to a progressive number that is incremented with every

trip.
• If the release has exceeded the threshold of the 30 openings, the oldest ones are
progressively overwritten.
Correlated measurements
The protection that trips determines the measurements recorded at the moment of the opening:
Protection against Measurements recorded at the moment of the opening

Phase currents L1, L2, L3, Ne, Ig, Igext, Irc.
NOTE:
• Ne is available with four-pole or three-pole CBs with
Current
external Neutral
• Ig is available with a release in the LSIG version.
• Igext is available with a release with a homopolar sensor.
• Irc is available with a release with a differential toroid.
Phase currents L1, L2, L3, Ne.
Temperature
NOTE:
the temperature cannot be viewed from the display.
Access to the most recent opening
The information on the most recent opening, as well as in the History Data menu, is accessible
in three different ways, according to the conditions of the release:
Condition Access mode

The main page is temporarily replaced by the
1) Opening just happened.
information page on the opening that just occurred.
2) Release with auxiliary power
The page is available until the reset of the release
supply (always on).
(through the iTest key).
1) Opening just happened.
2) Release without auxiliary power Pressing the iTest key displays the information page
supply or Ekip Measuring Pro on the opening that just occurred for a few seconds
connected (off with CB open).
From any page that is not a menu or a page opened
1) Fast reading with release on
from a menu, press the iTest button four times.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Events
Path
Description
The release can record the last 200 events, referring mainly to variations in status and operation.
Specifically, the recorded events can supply information on:
• Release: configuration status of the bus, operating mode, active set, auxiliary power supply.
• Protections: delay in action or alarm.
• Connection states or alarms: circuit-breaker, current sensors, trip coil, rating plug.
• Tripping: status of the opening command, or signal of opening for protection.
NOTE: in the list of the events, the first available is the most recent one. If the release
has exceeded the threshold of 200 events, the oldest ones are progressively overwritten.
Correlated information
Every event is correlated by the following information:

• Icon that identifies the type.
• Name
• Date and time.
There are 4 icons that identify the type of event:
Icon Description
Event reported for information purposes.
Delay of a protection in progress, trip expected.
Alarm referring to a non-hazardous condition.
Alarm for operation, failure, or connection fault.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Maximum and minimum

currents Path
Main page - Menus - Measurements - History - Measurements
NOTE: for the details on the pages, see the chapter Menu pages and menus, and
the paragraph Measurement history, beginning from page 65.
Description
The maximum and minimum currents are the recordings of the measurements of the maximum
and minimum phase currents performed by the release, and that can be displayed by selecting
I Max and I Min in the menu History - Measurements.
The interval between one measurement and the other can be set through the parameter
Measurement interval, available in the menu History.
The recordings can be reset through the command Reset measurements, available in the
menu History - Measurements.
Every measurement is correlated by the following information:

• The time interval since the previous measurement.
• The phase to which it refers, and value in Amperes.
• The date and time (referring to the internal clock).
• Graphical representation in the form of a histogram on a time axis.
NOTE:
• If the value is less than 0.03 In, “…” is shown instead of the value in Amperes.
• The graphical representation is in reference to 1 In, with a maximum value of 1.25
In
• When the parameter “Measurement interval” is modified, the release performs a
recording immediately.
Peak Factor
Path
Description
The selection of Peak factor in the menu Measurements allows you to display the
measurements in real time of the peak factors of the phase currents.
The measurements are expressed as a ratio between the peak values and RMS values, for
each individual phase.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Contact wear
Path
Description
Contact wear indicates the state of deterioration of the main contacts of the circuit-breaker.
The value is expressed as a percentage, and is 0% in the case of no wear, and 100% in the
case of total wear.
It is calculated automatically by the release at every trip for protection or, in the presence of an
auxiliary power supply, also at every manual opening of the circuit-breaker.
NOTE:
• On reaching 100%, the percentage is not increased any further.

• Reaching 80% is signalled with a prealarm, while reaching 100% is signalled with
an alarm.
IMPORTANT: 100% wear doesn't involve any functional limit for the release,
but the state of the circuit-breaker must be checked as soon as possible.
Datalogger
Path
Main page - Menus - Settings
Description
The datalogger it is a function that allows the recording of data associated to a trigger event.
The data recorded are:
• Analog measurements: phase currents and phase-to-phase voltages (if the Ekip Measuring
or Ekip Measuring Pro module is present).
• Digital events: protection alarms, circuit-breaker status signals, tripping of protections.
The recording is then downloadable to PC for reading and analysis.
IMPORTANT: the function is available with release energized with auxiliary

voltage.
Parameters
The following figure illustrates parameters that can be the set for the function.
A
E
Figure 84
C B
Pos. Description
A Trigger event
B Stop delay
C Pre-trigger
D Frequency window
E Recording window
Parameters that can be the set and the commands of the function are:
It selects the number of recordings (1 or 2).
Number of
dataloggers NOTE: the recordings are independent, but they share the
sampling frequency and the type of memory.
Determines the number of data logs recorded.
Sampling IMPORTANT:
frequency • A high frequency allows a more accurate analysis of the
data.
• The higher the frequency, the shorter the recording.
Allows you to set the parameters and to manually command recording
number 1.
• Stop Source: it selects the trigger event, on the occurrence of which
the recording is to be stopped.
• Stop Delay: sets the delay after the trigger event after which
Datalogger 1 recording is to be stopped
• Restart command: starts recording.
• Stop command: stops the recording and saves it in memory.
IMPORTANT: the recording can only be downloaded with

the Ekip Connect application.
The selection of two recordings parameters activates additional commands :
Datalogger 2 Like Datalogger 1, but relates to recording number 2.
Restart both Starts both the recordings.
Stop Both It stops both the recordings and saves them in memory.
With Ekip Connect software it is possible to select the parameter volatile RAM, not available
on the display, which allows to choose whether to keep the recording also with the release off
(non-volatile) or to delete it if the auxiliary power disappears (Volatile).
NOTE: The parameter is configured by default as non-volatile.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Operation counters
Path
Main page - Menus - About - Circuit-breaker
Description
In the presence of auxiliary power, the release records a series information relating to openings
of the circuit-breaker:
• The number of manual openings.
• The total number of operations (manual + trips).
By activating communication with the release, the following counters are also available:
• The number of openings due to tripping of protections.
• The number of openings due tripping of failed protections.
• The number of opening tests performed.
NOTE: the counters are updated only when the release is energized with auxiliary
voltage.
Summary table of base The following table summarises the base measurements:
measurements
Normal
Measurement
Quantities measured operating Accuracy
interval
interval
Phase currents (I1, I2, I3, Ine) 03…16 In 0.2…1.2 In 1%
Earth fault current (Ig) 08…4 In 0.2…1.2 In 2%
NOTE: the precisions refer to the normal operational intervals
ABB | SACE Emax 2
15 - Measuring Measurements
Presentation Measuring Measurements are available in all the models of releases of the Ekip TOUCH range
supplied with Ekip Measuring module or Ekip Measuring Pro.
Instantaneous
Real Time measurements of the voltages
voltages
Instantaneous
Real Time measurements of the active, reactive, apparent power
powers
Trips List of the trips due to voltage, frequency, power
History of the maximum voltages recorded with an interval that can
Maximum voltage
be set
History of the minimum voltages recorded with an interval that can
Minimum voltage
be set
History of the maximum active powers recorded with an interval
Maximum power
that can be set
History of the average active powers recorded with an interval that
Average power
can be set
Power factor Real time measurement of the power factor
Instantaneous
Measurement of the line frequency
frequency
Energy meters Measurement of active, reactive, apparent energy
With the Ekip Measuring Pro module and Ekip Synchrocheck, a further set with of measurements
is activated:
Measurements related to the function of synchronism between two
Synchrocheck
independent power supply systems.
130 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 15 - Measuring Measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Instantaneous voltages
Description
Instantaneous voltages are measurements in real time of the phase-to-phase voltages and
phase voltages.
NOTE: the measurements of the phase voltages are available with four-pole or three-
pole circuit-breakers configured with external neutral.
Voltage measurements are available in different representations, accessible from the following
pages:
• In the Histograms page there is a graphical representation in the form of a histogram of
the phase-to-phase voltages, and measurement in Volts of the highest voltage.
• In the Measurements Synthesis page, accessible from the Histograms page, there is
a measurement in Volts of the highest phase-to-phase voltage.
• In the Measuring instruments page there is a graphical representation in the form of a
volt meter and measurement in Volts of the highest phase-to-phase voltage.
• In the Measurements page there are measurements in Volts of all the phase-to-phase
voltages and phase voltages.
The measurements in Volts are available by a minimum value of 5 V to a maximum value of
1.25 Vn.
NOTE:
• For voltages lower than 5 V "…" is shown, while for voltages greater than 1.25 Vn
">1.25 Vn" is shown.
• In the Histograms page, the graphical representation of the voltages is in relation
1 Vn, with a maximum value of 1.25.
• By activating communication with the release, the maximum measurable voltage
is: 900 V x ratio between primary voltage and secondary voltage (example: primary
voltage= 1000 V, secondary voltage 200 V; the ratio is 5).
By activating communication with the release, the maximum remotely measurable voltage is
900 V.
NOTE: if there is an external transformer present, the maximum measurable voltage

is: 900 V x ratio between primary voltage and secondary voltage (example: primary
voltage= 1000 V, secondary voltage 200 V; the ratio is 5).
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Instantaneous powers
Description
Instantaneous powers are real time measurements of the total and phase power
NOTE: the measurements of the phase powers are available with four-pole circuit
breakers (4P) or three-pole circuit breakers configured with neutral voltage present
(3P + neutral voltage).
The power measurements are available in different representations, accessible from the
following pages:
• In the Measurements synthesis page, accessible from the Histograms page, there
are the measurements in kW or kVAR of the active, reactive and apparent total powers.
• In the Measuring instruments page there is a graphical representation in the form of
analog meters in kW or kVAR, for active, reactive and apparent total powers.
• In the Measurements page there are measurements in kW or to kVAR of the active,
reactive and apparent total powers and of phase (if provided).
NOTE: with 3P circuit-breakers only one Measurements page is available. With 4P

circuit-breakers or 3P + neutral voltage circuit-breakers, there are three Measurements
pages available that contain all the measurements of the powers (one for each phase).
The measurements in kW or kVAR are available with minimum voltages of 5 V and minimum
currents of 0.03 In The maximum measurable power value is 1.25 Pn.
NOTE:
• With voltages or currents lower than the minimum values, or power higher than
1.25 Pn, the indication “…” is shown.
• Pn is calculated as the product of In and primary Vn
Trips
Path
Description
The presence of the Ekip Measuring Pro module provides other types of openings, related to
the protections active with Measuring Pro.
The ways to access theses pages and the information contained are similar to those for
openings of the Basic protections.
Correlated measurements
The protection that trips determines the measurements recorded at the moment of the opening:
Protection against Measurements recorded at the moment of the opening

Phase currents (L1, L2, L3, Of), and phase-to-phase voltages
(U12, U23, U31).
Voltage
NOTES: U0 is available with four-pole or three-pole circuit-
breakers configured with voltage on the neutral, in the case of
tripping of protection RV.
Frequency Phase currents (L1, L2, L3, Of), and Line frequency.
Phase currents (L1, L2, L3, Of), and total power (active or apparent
Power
depending on the protection tripped).
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Maximum and Minimum voltage

Path
Description
The maximum and minimum Voltages are recordings of the measurements maximum and
minimum phase-to-phase voltages made by the release, and that can be displayed by selecting
U Max and U Min in the menu History - Measurements.

• The phase-to-phase voltage to which it refers, and value in Volt.
• The date and time (of the internal clock).
NOTE:
• If the value is less than 5 V, “…” is shown instead of the Volt values.
• The graphical representation is in relation to 1 Vn, with maximum value of 1.25 Vn.
• When the parameter Measurement interval is modified , the release performs a
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Maximum and minimum power

Path
Description
The maximum power and mean and are the recordings of the measurements of total maximum
and average active power made by the release, and that can be displayed by selecting P Max
and P Min in the menu History - Measurements.
NOTE: with external communication, recordings of total, maximum and average

reactive and apparent power measurements are also available.

• The value in kW.
• The date and time (referring to the internal clock).
NOTE:
• If current and voltage are lower than the minimum measurable values, the power
measurement indicates “…” instead of the value in kW.
• The graphical representation is in relation to 1 Pn, with maximum value of 1.25 Pn.
• Pn is calculated as the product of In and primary Vn
• If the value is negative, the corresponding bar is represented with different color to
those with positive value.
• When the parameter Measurement interval is modified , the release performs a
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Power factor
Path
Description
The power factor is the real time measurement of the ratio between active total power and
reactive total power, expressed as Cos φ.
Energy meters
Path
Main page - Menus - Measurements - Energy - Energy meters
Description
The energy meters are the measurements of the reactive and apparent active energy totals,
updated every minute.
The measurements can be reset through the command Reset Meters, available in the menu
Energy.
Runtime frequency
Path
Description
The Runtime frequency is the Real time measurement of line frequency, expressed in Hertz.
NOTE: The measurement of the line frequency is available with voltages greater than
0.1 Vn.
Synchrocheck
Path
Main page - Menus - Measurements - Ekip Synchrocheck
Description
The Synchrocheck measurements relating to the function of synchronism between 2

independent power sources, are described in the dedicated section on accessories, in the
paragraph dedicated to the Ekip Synchrocheck module.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Summary table of Measuring The following table summarises the base measurements:
measurements
Normal operating
Quantities measured Measurement interval Accuracy
interval
50…400 V (phase)
Line-to-line and phase
5 V…1.25 Vn 100…690 V 0.5 %
voltages
(phase-to-phase)
Line frequency 30…80 Hz 45…66 Hz 0.1 %
Active, reactive, and
-(16 In * 1.25 Vn)…(16 In * -6…-0.3 Pn /
apparent power (total and 2%
1.25 Vn) 0.3…6 Pn
phase)
Power factor -1…1 - 2%
Total apparent active, 1 kWh … 2 TWh
reactive, and apparent 1 kVAh … 2 TVARh - 2%
energy 1 kVARh … 2 TVAh
NOTE: the precisions refer to the normal operational intervals
ABB | SACE Emax 2
16 - Hi-Touch measurements
Presentation Hi-Touch measurements are available for Ekip Hi-Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch releases.
IMPORTANT: the measurements are available with releases equipped with

auxiliary power supply.
View of the wave forms of the voltage and current signals and
wave forms
current
View of the harmonic component of the voltage and current
Harmonics
signals
Network Analyzer Statistical analysis of voltages and currents
Wave forms
Path
Main page - Menus - Measurements - wave forms
Description
The selection of one of the listed quantities opens the representation of the wave form of the
selected quantity and acquired at the moment of selection.
The quantities with which the wave form can be displayed are:
• Phase currents L1, L2, L3, Of.
• Phase-to-phase voltages V12, V23, V31.
NOTE:
• The Ne phase current is available with four-pole or three-pole circuit-breakers with

external neutral.
• For the details on the pages, see the chapter “Menu Page and menus”, and the
paragraph “Measurements Menu”, on page 72.
Harmonics
Path
Main page - Menus - Measurements - wave forms
Description
In the page of the wave form above, pressing the Harmonics key opens a representation in
the form of a histogram of the measurements of the harmonics that compose the wave form,
and related to the frequency set in the menu Settings.
In order to display the harmonics, you need to enable the calculation of the harmonics through
the parameter Harmonic, available in the menu Measurements.
NOTE: For the details on the pages, see the chapter “Menu Page and menus”, and
the paragraph “Measurements Menu”, on page 72.
137 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 16 - Hi-Touch measurements
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Network Analyzer
Path
Main page - Menus - Measurements - Network Analyzer (for the measurements and the
counters)
Main page - Menus - Settings - Network Analyzer (for the control parameters)
Description
The Network Analyzer function allows you to set controls on long cycle voltage and current in
order to analyze the operation of the your system.
For this purpose, voltages and currents are monitored, so as to find:
• Average voltage.
• Short term voltage drops or interruptions.
• Short duration voltage increases.
• Slow voltage drops.
• Slow voltage increases.
• Imbalances between the voltages.
• Harmonic distortion of voltages and currents.
Each monitoring is associated with control parameters set by the user and counters that are
incremented each time there are control conditions set.
NOTE:
• On the display the cumulative counter and the counters refer to the last 24 hours
of activity (2 counters for each monitoring) are available.
• With external communication the cumulative counter and the counters refer to the
last 7 days of activity (8 counters for each monitoring) are available.
Average voltage
The average voltage is calculated considering the positive sequence of three-phase voltage
system.
There are two alarm counters:
• Over voltages counts the times in which the medium voltage rises above a threshold.
• Under voltages counts the times in which the average voltage falls below a threshold.
Parameters that can be set for the check are:
Defines the upper alarm threshold.
High Threshold
It is expressed as % Un.
Defines the lower alarm threshold.
Low Threshold
It is expressed as % Un.
Monitor time Defines the time interval between successive measurements.
NOTE: the monitor time is the same parameter available for the measurements of
currents and maximum voltages.
The checking is completed by these measurements:

• Cumulative positive sequence.
• Cumulative negative sequence.
• Positive sequence of the last period.
• Negative sequence of the last period.
NOTE: The measurements of the sequences are available following the path: Main
page - Menus - Measurements - Network Analyzer- Sequences Voltages.
Short duration voltage drops
The short duration voltage drop is to be understood as the reduction of any phase-to-phase
voltage below the set threshold, for a duration less than 40 ms.
The alarm threshold is expressed as % Un.
The corresponding alarm counter is called Interruptions.
Short duration voltage increases
The short duration voltage increase is to be understood as the increase in any phase-to-phase
voltage above the set threshold, for a duration less than 40 ms.
The alarm threshold is expressed as % Un.
The corresponding alarm counter is called Spikes.
Slow voltage drops
The slow voltage drop is the lowering of any phase-to-phase voltage, under one of the set
thresholds, for a duration greater than the set time.
The corresponding alarm counter is called Sags.
Sag Threshold Defines the first alarm threshold.
(First Class) It is expressed as % Un.
Sag Time (First In the event of dropping under the first alarm threshold, it defines
Class) the time beyond which the alarm counter is increased.
Sag Threshold It defines the second alarm threshold.
(Second Class) It is expressed as % Un.
Sag Time (Second In the event of dropping under the second alarm threshold, it
Class) defines the time beyond which the alarm counter is increased.
Sag Threshold Defines the third alarm threshold.
(Third Class) It is expressed as % Un.
Sag Time (Third In the event of dropping under the third alarm threshold, it defines
IMPORTANT: in order to intercept all the voltage drop events (both slow and
short duration drops), it is recommended to set:
• Sag Threshold (First Class) = Interruptions threshold.

• Sag Time (First Class) = 40ms.
Slow voltage increases
The slow voltage increase is the rise of any phase-to-phase voltage above one of the set
thresholds, for a duration greater than the set time.
The corresponding alarm counter is called Swells.
Swell Threshold Defines the first alarm threshold.
(First Class) It is expressed as % Vn.
Swell Time (First In the event of rising above the first alarm threshold, it defines the
Class) time beyond which the alarm counter is increased.
Swell Threshold It defines the second alarm threshold.
(Second Class) It is expressed as % Vn.
Swell Time (Second In the event of rising above the second alarm threshold, it defines
IMPORTANT: in order to intercept all the raised voltage events (both slow and
short duration), it is recommended to set:
• Swell Threshold (First Class) = Spike threshold.

• Swell Time (First Class) = 40ms.
Imbalance between the voltages
In a three-phase system, imbalance occurs when the phase or concatenated amplitudes are
different, or when the phase angles differ from balanced conditions (or both these conditions).
The phase shifting is calculated considering the positive and negative sequences of the three-
phase system.
The phase shifting threshold is expressed in %, in which a value equal to 0% corresponds to
a balanced three-phase system.
The corresponding alarm counter is called Voltage unbalance.
Harmonic distortion
The Harmonic Distortion check regards phase-to-phase voltages and the phase currents, and
is of two types:
• If the total distortion is higher than the set value, the alarm counter is incremented THD.
• If the individual harmonic components (different from the fundamental) have higher amplitude
than the set value, the alarm counter is incremented Harm.
NOTE: to allow checking of Harmonic Distortion, you need to enable the calculation
of the harmonics through the Harmonic parameter, available in the Measurements
menu.
Voltage THD Defines the alarm threshold for the total distortion of the voltages.
Threshold It is expressed as a %.
Current THD Defines the alarm threshold for the total distortion of the currents.
Threshold It is expressed as a %.
Defines the alarm threshold for the individual harmonics of the
Individual voltage
voltages.
harmonic threshold
It is expressed as a %.
Defines the alarm threshold for the individual harmonics of the
Individual current
currents.
harmonic threshold
It is expressed as a %.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
17 - Test
Test
Path
Main page - Menus - Test
Presentation
All the releases of the Ekip Touch range allow you to carry out various checks directly from the
display:
• Self-test, for the check on the display and the LEDs.
• Trip Test, for the check on the circuit breaker opening command.
• Test CB, for the check on the controls of the circuit-breaker opening and closing coils
• Zone Selectivity, for the check on inputs and outputs of zone selectivity.
In the presence of auxiliary power supply and contact type modules, the dedicated sections
are enabled:
• Ekip Signalling 4K, it allows the check of LED and contacts of the module.
• Ekip Signalling 2K-1, 2K-2, 2K-3, it allows the check of LED and contacts of the module.
• Ekip Signalling 10K-1, 10K-2, 10K-3, it allows the check of LED and contacts of the
module.
In the presence of an Rc type release and auxiliary power supply, the dedicated test section
is enabled:
• RC test, allows you to check the connection and correct operation of the residual current
sensor.
NOTE: access to the test menu requires the insertion of the password.
Using the test accessories Ekip T&P and Ekip Bluetooth it is also possible to verify the
commands of the protections.
Self-test
The automatic sequence of the display and the LED is activated by selecting the command
Self-test.
The sequence includes the following test phases:
Phase Operation
1 Screen with message “www.abb.com”.
2 Darkening of the display.
Color sequence with red, green, blue bands, with gradual increase of
3
backlighting
4 Warning and Alarm LEDs switched on for 1 second.
Trip Test
Selecting the command Trip test opens a dedicated page that requests confirmation for
performing the test by pressing the iTest key.
When the key is pressed, an opening command is sent to the trip coil.
IMPORTANT: the trip command is performed with the circuit-breaker closed

and absence of circulating currents.
141 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 17 - Test
IMPORTANT: the zone selectivity commands work with:
• Auxiliary power supply present.

• Circuit-breaker open and, in the case of the withdrawable version, in
connected or test position.
Zone Selectivity
IMPORTANT:
• The coil opening and closing commands work only with the release
powered by auxiliary power supply.
• Make sure that the coils are connected to the power supply source.
• The commands verify the operation of the release: eventual faults on Ekip
COM Actuator or the coils are not found by the test.
Test CB
Selecting the command Test CB opens a submenu containing the commands Open CB and
Close CB.
The commands allow you to activate coil opening and closing respectively: the correct sending
of the command is confirmed by a window with the message “Test Executed”.
The correct operation of the entire command system (release, Ekip COM Actuator and opening
and closing coils) is verified with the opening and/or the closing of the circuit-breaker.
NOTE:
• The command Open CB is sent in the presence of a closed or open circuit breaker.
• The Close CB is activated in the presence of an open circuit-breaker.
The command Zone Selectivity allows you to select the line you want to check: Protection
S or Protection G.
The following are available for each command:
• Input, to check the state of the zone selectivity input.
• Output force, to force the state of the zone selectivity output high.
• Release Output, to release the override on the zone selectivity output.
Ekip Signalling
The submenus for testing the Ekip Signalling modules in the various versions 4K, 2K-1, 2K-2,
2K-3, 10K-1, 10K-2, 10K-3 allow you to send the command of Self-test.
The command activates an automatic sequence of test LED and contacts:
Phase Operation
1 Reset LED and output contacts .
Switch-on in sequence of all LEDs and the closing in sequence of all the
2
associated output contacts
3 Reset initial conditions
NOTE: with Ekip Signalling modules 2K-1, 2K-2, 2K-3, the sequence includes testing
of the LEDs of the inputs.
IMPORTANT: the self-test sequence involves the sending of the close command
of the output contacts: the check on the correct closing is the user's
responsibility.
RC test
Submenus for the test of the Rc sensor involve the command Self-test. that allows the
command to be sent to the RC sensor to check on the correct operation.
NOTE: the test is available only with sensor correctly connected, release in Rc
configuration, auxiliary power supply present.
Protection test
To perform the protection command test, follow the following procedure:
Phase Operation
Make sure that the circuit-breaker is closed and that there are no currents
1
circulating
2 Connect a test front unit between Ekip T&P or Ekip Bluetooth
Open the Information page and select the Test command, which opens the
4
protection test page
5 Set up the test as required and verify that the release functions properly
ABB | SACE Emax 2
18 - Self-diagnosis
Alarms and signals

Alarm Tests
Ekip Touch provides a series of signals that indicate its operating state, alarms present, or
configuration errors in progress.
The signals are provided:
• With LEDs, as described on page 56.
• With messages on the diagnostics bar
The messages on the diagnostics bar can be divided into 3 categories: self-diagnosis,
protection or measurement alarms, and programming error.
Self-diagnosis Ekip Touch continuously monitors its own operating state and that of all the devices to which
it is connected.
In the event of an error, the fault detected is reported:
Signal Description
Local bus No module detected on the terminal box
Trip Coil disconnected Trip Coil not connected
L1 sensor Disconnected Current sensor not connected
Ne sensor Disconnected Current sensor not connected
Gext sensor Disconnected Current sensor not connected
Rating Plug Error Rating plug not connected or not installed
Internal Error Internal error
Invalid Date Date not set
CB Status Error Circuit-breaker status contacts error
Rating Plug Installation Warning Rating plug not installed
Battery Low Battery not working or absent
Voltage module Installation warning Ekip Measuring module not installed
Voltage Module Error Ekip Measuring module in error
NOTE: for resolution of the signals see section Fault resolution on page 246.
144 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 18 - Self-diagnosis
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Protections and Measurements In the event of protection or measurement alarms, the associated signals are reported:
Signal Alarm type

L pre-alarm L Protection
G prealarm Protection G
Gext prealarm Gext protection
S Alarm (blocked trip) Protection S
S2 Alarm (blocked trip) Protection S2
T prealarm Protection T
UV alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection UV
OV alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection OV
G alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection G
Gext alarm (Blocked Trip) Gext protection
T alarm Protection T
T alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection T
RV alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection RV
RP alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection RP
UF alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection UF
OF alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection OF
UnderActivePowerBlockedTrip Protection UP
MaxReactivePowerBlockedTrip Protection OQ
UV2 alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection UV2
OV2 alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection OV2
UF2 alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection UF2
OF2 alarm (Blocked Trip) Protection OF2
ROCOFalarmBlockedTrip Protection ROCOF
LC Alarm Current thresholds protections
Iw warning Current thresholds protections
Contact Wear PreAlarm Contact wear measurement
Contact Wear Alarm Contact wear measurement
Harmonic Distorsion > 2.1 Harmonic distortion measurement
Power Factor Error Power factor measurement
Phase Cycle Error Cyclical sequence measurement
Frequency Error Frequency measurement
Single Current Harmonic over threshold Harmonics measurement
Single Voltage Harmonic over threshold Harmonics measurement
Current THD over threshold Harmonics measurement
Voltage THD over threshold Harmonics measurement
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Programming errors If during the programming of the parameters an attempt is made to violate certain limitations,
the release blocks the saving procedure and signals the error:
Type of error Error description

Errors in the adjustment of the protection
L Th ≥ S Th
thresholds
S Th ≥ I Th
thresholds
L Th ≥ S2 Th
thresholds
S2 Th ≥ I Th
thresholds
L Th ≥ D Th
thresholds
D Th ≥ I Th
thresholds
Activation of zone selectivity with
D Zone Sel = On while S / S2/ G / Rc = On
protections S, S2, G or Rc enabled
S(V) t20 and S(V) I20 error Incorrect configuration of the protection S(V)
RQ Q24 > Q25 Incorrect configuration of the protection RQ
Error in the parameters of the Ekip
SYNCHRO parameters error
Synchrocheck module
Incorrect configuration of the protection
ROCOF t28 error
ROCOF
Simultaneous enabling of the protections I
And the MCR enabled together
and MCR
Protection and delay alarms present during
High priority alarm
programming
An attempt is made to activate the RC
Rc toroid error sensor without Ekip Measuring or RC type
rating plug
It tries to set the internal neutral setting with
Internal neutral config error
a value that is not allowed
Change nr datalogger with dlogger not Change datalogger parameters with
stopped datalogger active
Change in the parameter "pole order" with a
Reverse pole order error
Half size circuit-breaker.
Programming Session Timeout Timeout for saving data
ABB | SACE Emax 2
19 - Operating features
Electrical characteristics
Currents and operating voltages
The correct operation of Ekip Touch releases is guaranteed with primary currents with clearly
defined characteristics.
In addition, Ekip Touch releases can be powered directly by the internal current sensors or, in
the presence of the Ekip Measuring Pro module, by the installation voltage.
The following are the specifications:

> 80 A (E1.2 - E2.2 - E4.2)
Minimum three-phase turn-on current
>160 A (E6.2)
Rated Frequency 50 / 60 Hz ± 10 %
Peak Factor Conforming to standard 60947-2
Minimum three-phase turn-on voltage > 80 V
Auxiliary power supply
All Ekip Touch releases can be connected to an external auxiliary power source, useful for
activating certain functions such as communication on local bus, recording of manual
operations, certain measurements and dataloggers.
The auxiliary power can be supplied by the modules of the Ekip Supply range (for further
functional details, see page 162), or with direct connection to a terminal box.
The direct connection must be made guaranteeing the operating following conditions:

Voltage 24 Vdc galvanically isolated
Tolerance ± 10 %
Maximum ripple ±5%
Maximum inrush
10 A per 5 ms
current @ 24 V
Maximum rated
4W
power @ 24 V
Connection cable Insulated with earth cable (advised BELDEN 3105A/B)
IMPORTANT:
• With a direct connection, the power must be galvanically isolated and must
ensure the insulation characteristics retrieved from IEC 60950 (UL 1950)
or equivalent standards that ensure a common mode current, or leakage
current, (see IEC 478/1, CEI 22/3) no greater than 3.5 mA.
• The Ekip Supply modules do not require galvanic insulation.
147 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 19 - Operating features
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Functional specifications
Introduction
The Ekip Touch release, in addition to the protection and measurement menus, also allows
various operating and configuration parameters to be set on the screen:
• Line frequency, to set the installation frequency.
• Remote / Local Mode, to set the operating mode and enable editing of parameters and
sending commands remotely.
• Local bus, to enable communication with the terminal modules and communication on
the local bus.
• Harmonics, to enable the calculation of harmonic currents and voltages.
• Power controller, to enable the functionality Ekip Power Controller.
• Function, to combine modification of parameters and configurations with Ekip Signalling
modules.
• System, to modify system data such as date, time, language and password.
Line frequency
The adjustment of the frequency setting is used in order to set the installation frequency.
In the menu Settings - Network frequency 2 configurations are available: 50 and 60 Hz.
NOTE: measurements of voltages and currents are performed in function of the grid
frequency set. A wrong setting could cause protection and measurement faults.
Local/Remote
In the menu Settings - Modules - Local/Remote you can enable modification of the parameters
and sending of certain commands remotely, via Ekip Com communication modules.
Enabling Remote configuration inhibits the ability to change from display of all parameters, with
the exception of the parameter Local / Remote.
NOTE: in Remote configuration the inhibition of changes is active if:
• The release is connected to one auxiliary power supply.

• There are Ekip Com modules present.
Local bus
In the menu Settings - Modules - Local Bus you can enable the local bus line to allow
communication with all modules mounted on the terminal block or switchgear.
NOTE: the error on the local bus is signalled if the release is powered by Ekip Supply,
but no module is connected and the Local Bus parameter is enabled.
Harmonics
The releases in the versions Hi-TOUCH and G Hi-TOUCH, in the menu Measurements -
Harmonic allow you to enable the check on the harmonics of the current signals and voltage.
The harmonics are essential for:
• Function Network Analyzer.
• Measurement of Wave Form.
Power Controller
The description of Ekip Power Controller is available beginning from page 151.
148 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 19 - Operating features
ABB | SACE Emax 2
20 - Default parameters
Ekip TOUCH default parameters The Ekip Touch releases are supplied with the following default parameters:
Protection/Parameter Value (1)

L 1 In; 144 s; Prealarm: 90 %
S (2) Off; 2 In; 50 ms; Curve: t = k
I 4 In
MCR Off; 6 In; 40 ms
G (2) Off; 0.25 In; 400 ms; Curve: t = k
IU Off; 50%; 5 s
OT Off
Current thresholds Off; 1: 50 %; 2: 75 %
Current thresholds Off; Iw1: 3 In; Iw2: 3 In
Harmonic Distortion On
Gext (2) (3) Off; 0.25 In; 400 ms; Curve: t = k
Rc (3) Off; 3 A; 60 ms
Frequency 50 Hz
Off (for CB 3 P)
Neutral
50% (for CB 4 P)
Datalogger Off
Power Controller see note (4)
Hardware Trip Disabled
Monitor Time 5 min
Local bus Disabled
Alive LED Disabled
Language English
Password 00001
Mode Local
Modbus RTU par Address: 247; baudrate: 19.2 Kb
Profibus par Address: 2
Devicenet MAC ID: 63; baudrate: 125 Kb
Modbus TCP Static IP: 0.0.0.0
(1)
Thermal memory, startup, Zone selectivity set to Off.
(2)
Protection S available with LSI and LSIG versions of the release. Protection G available with LSIG version.
(3)
Protections available in the presence of the respective sensors.
(4)
Protection activated on request when purchasing the release.
The protections activated by the presence of the Ekip Measuring Pro module, have the following
default parameters:
VU Off; 50%; 5 s
UV Off; 0.9 Un; 5 s
OV Off; 1.05 Un; 5 s
UF Off; 0.9 fn; 3 s
OF Off; 1.1 fn; 3 s
RP Off; 0.1 Sn; 10 s
Phase Sequence 123
Cos φ Off; 0.95
149 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 20 - Default parameters
The Ekip Hi-Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch releases have additional protections, provided with the
following default parameters:

S2 Off; 2 In; 50 ms; Curve: t = k
D Off; 2 In; 200 ms
UV2 Off; 0.9 Un; 5 s
OV2 Off; 1.05 Un; 5 s
UF2 Off; 0.9 fn; 3 s
OF2 Off; 1.1 fn; 3 s
Network Analyzer Off
Harmonic calculation Off
Set A-B Off
The Ekip G Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch releases have additional protections, provided with the
following default parameters:

Off; 0.6 In; type: Voltage consent; U1 = 100; U2 = 50; U =
S (v)
100
RV Off; 0.15 Un; 15 s
Off; K1 = -2; K2 = 2; q01 = 0.1 An; q02= 0.11 An; Vmin =
RQ
0.5 Un; 100 s
OQ Off; 1 sn; 1 s
OP Off; 1 sn; 1 s
UP Off; 1 sn; 1 s
The Ekip G Hi-Touch release has additional protections, provided with the following default
parameters:
Rocof Off; 0.6 Hz; 600 ms
Off; 0.6 In; type: Voltage consent; U1 = 100; U2 = 50; U =
S2 (v)
100
Off; K1 = -2; K2 = 2; q01 = 0.1 An; q02= 0.11 An; Vmin =
RQ2
0.5 Un; 100 s
150 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 20 - Default parameters
ABB | SACE Emax 2
21 - Ekip Power Controller
Characteristics
Presentation
The Ekip Power Controller function allows you to manage the load of an installation according
to the power input, in order to contain the consumptions and to optimize the energy efficiency.
The configuration of the various parameters related to the this functionality is available through
a dedicated tool inside the Ekip Connect software.
All the detailed information on the Power Controller function is provided in White Paper
1SDC007410G0901.
Releases
The functionality Ekip Power Controller can be activated for all the releases of the Ekip TOUCH
range, and allows you to do the following via display:
• Modify some of the parameters of the function.
• Display some measurements of the function.
• View the status of the loads.
NOTE: the Ekip Power Controller function is available if requested when ordering the
CB or the protection Release.
Parameters on the display
The parameters available following the path Main page - Menus - Settings - Power Controller
are:
It allows you to activate/deactivate the Ekip Power Controller
Enable
function.
It allows you to set the configuration of each of the 15
Load Operating
programmable loads
Mode
Automatic or Manual configurations available.
It allows you to set the 4 power limits (from 0 to 5000 kW, step
Power limits
5kW).
NOTE: for the characterization of all the parameters of the function you are advised
to configure the parameters via Ekip Connect first, and only subsequently to operate
on the release in order to enable or to modify load and power limits.
151 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 21 - Ekip Power Controller
Measurements on the Display
The measurements are available by following the path Main page - Measurements page - Page
Power Controller , they are:
Measurement Description
Ea Expected energy
DT Time elapsed inside of the evaluation window
LOADS Number of loads monitored
LOADS Shed Number of shed loads
Sp Shed priority set
T Evaluation window
Info on the display
Information is available on the activation and status of the 15 loads by following the path Main
page - Menu - About - Power Controller.
152 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Ekip Touch protection release | 21 - Ekip Power Controller
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Accessories
1 - Preliminary considerations
Introduction The Emax E2.2 E4.2 E6.2 circuit breakers have a series of electric and mechanical accessories
applicable according to the circuit-breaker type, and a series of electronic accessories
applicable according to the type of Ekip release with which the circuit-breaker is equipped.
Accessory combination tables The following table shows the possible combinations of the electrical and mechanical
accessories:
Circuit- Derived versions

Type of Accessory Accessory Disconnectors
breakers CS MV MTP
AUX 4Q S R - - -
AUX 6Q R R - - -
AUX 15Q R R - - -
Electrical signalling AUP (*) R R R R R
RTC R R - - -
S51 S - - - -
S33 M/2 R R - - -
YO-YC R R - - -
YO2-YC2 R R - - -
Electrical control YU R R - - -
M R R - - -
YR R - - - -
KLC and PLC R R - - -
KLP and PLP (*) R R - - R
SL (*) S S - - S
SLE (*) R R - - -
Safety mechanical DLR (*) R R - - R
DLP (*) R R - - R
DLC R R - - R
Anti-racking-in lock S S - - S
MOC R R - - R
PBC R R - - R
Protection mechanical
IP54 R R - - R
Interlocks MI R R - - R
S: Standard. R: On request. (*): only for withdrawable version.
153 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Accessories | 1 - Preliminary considerations

The following table shows the possible combinations of the electronic accessories:
Release
Type of accessory Accessory Ekip Ekip G
Ekip Ekip Ekip G
Hi- Hi-
DIP Touch Touch
Touch Touch
Power supply Ekip Supply R R R R R
Ekip Com - R R R R
Ekip Com Redundant - R R R R
Connectivity Ekip Com Actuator R R R R R
Ekip Link R R R R R
Ekip Bluetooth R R R R R
Ekip Signalling 2K - R R R R
Signal Ekip Signalling 4K - R R R R
Ekip Signalling 10K - R R R R
Ekip Measuring - R - - -
Ekip Measuring Pro - R S S S
Ekip Synchrocheck - R R R R
Measurement and Ekip Fan R R R R R
Protection Rating Plug R R R R R
Homopolar toroid - R R R R
Differential toroid - R R R R
External neutral sensor R R R R R
Display and Ekip Multimeter R R R R R
Supervision Ekip Control Panel R R R R R
Testing and Ekip TT R S S S S
Programming Ekip T&P R R R R R
S: Standard. R: On request.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Circuit-breaker dismantling To dismantle the accessories, the following parts must be removed from the circuit-breaker:
operations
• Transparent flange (A) of the release, by turning the screws (B).
• Escutcheon plate of the circuit-breaker (C), by removing the mounting screws (D).
1
2
C 2
1
90°
A
B
D
Figure 85 - Removing the flange and escutcheon plate
After reassembling the accessories, the parts previously disassembled must be reassembled
as indicated:
• Escutcheon plate of the circuit-breaker (C), by screwing in the mounting screws (D). Tighten
with tightening torque 1.1 Nm.
• Transparent flange (A) of the release, by turning the screws (B).
C 2
1
2
1
90°
A
B
D
Figure 86 - Assembly of flange and escutcheon plate

ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 - Wiring diagrams
General wiring diagrams The following is the wiring diagram of the circuit-breaker:
N L1 L2 L3
K51
XK1
1
Q
XK1
T11 13 >
YO1
TI/L1 T12 14
2
T21 11 >>
TI/L2 T22 12
XK3
T31 9 7
TI/L3 T32 10 >>
A1 T41 7 Q/26
TI/N T42 8 >>
> 8
XK3
XK1
T13 21
>> 9
UI/L1 T14 22
Q/27
T23 19
UI/L2 10
T24 20 EKIP DIP
EKIP TOUCH
T33 17 XK3
UI/L3 EKIP HI-TOUCH 5
T34 18
EKIP G TOUCH
T43 15 EKIP G HI-TOUCH
UI/N T44 16 RTC EKIP
6
* C)
* H)
Diagram A - General diagram of the circuit-breaker
NOTE: The diagram is shown in the following conditions:
• Circuit-breaker in withdrawable version (also valid for fixed version), open and
connected.
• Circuits de-energized.
• Releases not tripped.
• Motor operator with springs unloaded.
The following is the wiring diagram of the switch-disconnector:
N L1 L2 L3
A1
Q
Diagram B - General diagram switch-disconnector
156 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Accessories | 2 - Wiring diagrams

The wiring diagram of the circuit breaker is illustrated without any indication of the auxiliary
power supply of the Ekip release. If the circuit-breaker is accessorized with the Ekip Supply
module, for information see the page 162.
If the circuit-breaker is not accessorized with the Ekip Supply module, for the connection of the
auxiliary power supply of the Ekip release see the direct power supply diagram shown below.
31
* P)
-
+
A4
Uaux.
24VDC
X K1 K2
XV K1 K2
K1
K2
A3
K51
EKIP
W3
W4
XV W3 W4
X W3 W4
A4 * Q)
(A) (B)
W2 (LOCAL BUS)
Diagram 31 - Direct auxiliary power supply
Circuit-breaker terminal box The circuit-breaker is equipped with a terminal box for the wiring of the accessories that varies
according to the type of circuit-breaker:
• Terminal box for circuit-breaker in fixed version.
• Terminal box for circuit-breaker in withdrawable version.
The differences between the two terminal boxes are shown in Figure 87 :
61 71 81 91 01 45
51 HC H1 H2 H3 H4 95 35 R1 V3 Vn Ge+ Szi Ne- K2 W4 D1 C1 C11 C21 11 21 31 41
62 72 82 92 02
52 96 36 U1 R2 V2 Rct Ge- Szo Ne+ K1 W3 46 C3 C13 12 22 32 42
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04 98 38
54
HC K7 K8 K9 K10 U2 V1 Gzo Szc Gzi Rca 48 D2 C2 C12 C22 14 24 34 44
Q5..Q10/EKIP Signalling 4K S51 S33 Trip Unit I/O EKIP Supply Module Module Module YU YC YO YC2 Q1 Q2
RTC YO2 Q3 Q4
M YR
71 81 91 01
51 61HC H1 H2 H3 H4 95 35 R1 V3 Vn Ge+ Szi Ne- 45 D1 C1 C11 C21 11 21 31 41
62 72 82 92 02
52 HC K3 K4 K5 K6 96 36 U1 R2 V2 Rct Ge- Szo W3 K1 Ne+ 46 C3 C13 12 22 32 42
74 84 94 04
54 64 98 38 U2 V1 Gzo Szc Gzi W4 K2 Rca 48 D2 C2 C12 C22 14 24 34 44
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
Module EKIP Supply TU YU YC
Q5..Q10/EKIP Signalling 4K S51 S33 M YR Trip Unit I/O Module Module I/O RTC YO2 YO YC2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Figure 87
On page 158, the representation of the terminal box for a circuit-breaker in fixed version is
shown.
NOTE: for the details of the wiring diagram of each individual accessory, please refer
to the specific pages that describe the accessory in question.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Figure number of the diagram n
42
Q/4 44
Q4
41
42
44
41
32
Q/3 34
Q3
Open/closed auxiliary contacts
31
31
32
34
81 22
Q/2 81
24 of the circuit-breaker (first set)
Q2
21
21
22
24
12
Q/1 14
11
YO YC2 Q1
12
14
11
YC2
C21
C1 C11 C21
C2 C12 C22
79 C22 Second closing coil 79
C11
YO
YO
C11
C3 C13
77 C12 78 K51
YO
C13
First opening coil 77 78
C12
C1
First closing coil
YC
YU YC
C1
YC
75 76 K51 C3 75 76
C2 YC C2
Second opening coil
RTC YO2
D1
D2
72 73 74
YO2
D1 73 Under-voltage coil
YU
D1
72 D2 74 D2
Contact ready to close
45
46
48
RTC
46 71
71 48
45
K51
Ne+
Rca
Ne-
Input of current sensor on the external neutral
I/O
TU
Ne
27 Ne- 27
K51/..
31 W3
LOCAL BUS
Ventilation operating mechanism
K1
K2
32 W4 31 32
EKIP Supply
K1
33 ALIM. AUS. +/L
W3
W4
AUX. SUPPLY -/N K2 Auxiliary power supply and local bus 33 34
34
41 K51/SIGN H12
K51/SIGN K12 K51/SYNC KS1 48
O 12
I 12 K14 XSC KS2

Module
K51/SIGN K51/SYNC
O 11
H11
K51/SIGN K11 Vs VS1
HC1 I 11 K13 VS2
42 K51/SIGN H22
K51/SIGN K22 K51/COM 51 Signalling modules 41 42 43
O 22
I 22
..
O ORTA COMUNIC.
K24 W..
COMMUN. O ORT
Module
K51/SIGN
and/or Ekip synchro check
O 21
H21
K51/SIGN K21 .. 48
HC2 I 21 K23
58
and/or Communication modules 51 .. .. 58
43 K51/SIGN H32
K51/SIGN K32 K51/COM 61
O 32
I 32
.. and/or redundant communication modules 61 .. .. 66
O ORTA COMUNIC.
K34 W..R
COMMUN. O ORT
RIDONDANTE
REDUNDANT
K51/SIGN
Module
O 31
H31
K51/SIGN K31 ..
HC3 I 31 K33
66
K51
Szi
Rct Ge- Szo
V1 Gzo Szc Gzi

Szi
K51 K51
Szo Zone selectivity 26
Gzi
Trip Unit I/O
Rct 26 Gzo
Rct Rca
Input of the TRAFO star centre sensor 25
Vn Ge
Szc
25 Rca
24 Ge+
Ge-
K51/MEAS K51/MEAS K51/MEAS

Input of the residual-current protection RC sensor 24
VN VN
V3
V2
21 V1
Ekip Measuring voltage sockets 20 21 22 23
20 23 V2
22 V3
N L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3
YR
Trip reset coil YR

R1
R2
14
YR
R1
14 R2
Closing springs loading motor
U1
U2
F1 S33M/1 13
M
U1
M
13 U2
S51 S33
Springs loaded position signalling contact

35
36
38
36
S33M/2 12
12 38
35
96
Trip signalling contact
95
96
98
S51 11
11 98
95
H4
K6
K10
EKIP Signalling 4K
K51/SIGN K6 02
K51/SIGN Q/10
01
02
04
H4
I 04
O 04 04
K10
01
H3
K5
K9
K51/SIGN K5 92
K51/SIGN H3 Q/9 Ekip signalling 4K 2
91
92
94
I 03
O 03 94
K9
91
K4
K8
H2
K51/SIGN K4 82
K51/SIGN Q/8
Additional auxiliary contacts
H2
81
82
84
I 02
O 02 84
K8
81 1
of the circuit-breaker (second set)
H1
K3
K7
K51/SIGN K3 72
K51/SIGN H1 Q/7
I 01
71
72
74
O 01 74
K7
71
HC
HC
HC
62
Q5..Q10
HC Q/6 64
61
62
64
61
52
Q/5
51
52
54
54
51
2 1

The following is a key to the symbols used in the wiring diagrams:
Symbol Description
* See the note indicated by the letter
A1 Applications applied to the moving part of the circuit-breaker
A3 Applications applied to the fixed part of the circuit-breaker
Indicative equipment and connections for operating and signalling, external
A4
to the circuit-breaker
BUS1 Serial interface with the external bus
Electronic time-delay device of the under-voltage coil YU, external to the
D
circuit-breaker
F1 Time-delayed trip fuse
Input for zone selectivity for protection G or input in “inverse” direction for
GZi(DBi)
protection D
Output for zone selectivity for protection G or output in “inverse” direction
GZo(DBo)
for protection D
I O1…32 Programmable digital inputs of the Ekip protection release
K51 Overcurrent protection solid-state release
K51 / COM Communication module
K51 / FAN Fan power supply module
K51 / MEAS Measurement module
K51 / SIGN Signalling module
K51 /
Optional auxiliary power supply module (24-48Vdc and 110-220Vac / dc)
SUPPLY
K51 /
Synchronization module
SYNC
K51 / YC Closing command via Ekip protection release
K51 / YO Opening command via Ekip protection release
M Motor for loading the closing springs
M2 Fan motor
O 01...32 Programmable signalling contacts of the Ekip protection release
O SC Contact of the Ekip protection release for synchronism control
Q Circuit-breaker
Q / 1...Q
Auxiliary contacts of the circuit-breaker
/ 27
RC RC protection sensor (residual current)
RT1…RT3 Temperature sensors
RTC EKIP Auxiliary contact ready to close the circuit-breaker
RTC Contact for signalling circuit-breaker ready to close
S33M /
Spring loading motor limit contacts
1…2
S43 Switch for setting remote/local control
S51 Opening signalling contact
S75E / Contacts for signalling circuit-breaker in disconnected position (only with
1…4 withdrawable circuit-breakers)
Contacts for signalling circuit-breaker in connected position (only with
S75I / 1…5
withdrawable circuit-breakers)
S75T / Contacts for signalling circuit-breaker in test position (only with
1…2 withdrawable circuit-breakers)
SC Push-button or contact for closing the circuit-breaker
SO Push-button or contact for immediate opening of the circuit-breaker
Push-button or contact for opening the circuit-breaker with time-delayed
SO1
trip

SR Push-button or contact for electrical reset of the break contact S51

Input for zone selectivity for protection S or input in “inverse” direction for
SZi(DFi)
protection S
Output for zone selectivity for protection S or output in “direct” direction for
SZo(DFo)
protection D
TI / L1 Current transformer, phase L1
TI / N Current transformer on the neutral
TU1…TU2 Isolation voltage transformer (external to the circuit-breaker)
Uaux Auxiliary power supply voltage
UI / L1 Current sensor, phase L1
UI / N Current sensor on the neutral
UI / O Homopolar current sensor
W2 Serial interface with the internal bus (local bus)
W9…W13 RJ45 connector for communication modules
W9R...
RJ45 connector for redundant communication modules
W11R
Delivery connector for the auxiliary circuits of the circuit-breaker in
X
withdrawable version
XB1...XB7 Connectors for the circuit-breaker applications
Delivery terminal box for the position contacts of the circuit-breaker in
XF
withdrawable version
XF1…XF2 Contact of the Ekip protection release for activation of the fans
XK1…XK3 Connectors for the auxiliary circuits of the Ekip protection release
XK7 Connector for the auxiliary circuits of the communication modules
Delivery terminal box for the auxiliary circuits of the circuit-breaker in fixed
XV
version
YC Closing coil
YC2 Second closing coil
YO Opening coil
YO1 Opening coil for overcurrent
YO2 Second opening coil
YR Coil for electrical reset of the break contact S51
YU Under-voltage coil
The following is a key to the notes used in the wiring diagrams:
Note Description
A) The auxiliary power supply for the Ekip release is obligatory
C) Always supplied with the Ekip Com module.
D) Always supplied with the motor for loading the closing springs (diagram 13)
Voltage transformer, mandatory in the case of external outlet sockets.
E) External outlet sockets, mandatory for systems with rated voltage greater
than 690V.
The connections between the residual-current protection RC sensor and
the poles of connector X (or XV) of the circuit-breaker must be implemented
F) with a screened two-pole cable with paired braided conductors (BELDEN
9696 paired type or equivalent), with length no greater than 10m. The
screen must be earthed on the circuit-breaker side.

Note Description
With all the electronic protection releases equipped with a display interface
with LSIG protections, protection against earth faults (Gext) is available
through a current sensor positioned on the star centre of the MV/LV
G) transformer. The connection between terminals 1 and 2 of the UI/O current
transformer and the Ge+ and Ge- poles of connector X (or XV) must be
implemented with two-pole shielded stranded cable (BELDEN 9841 type or
equivalent) no more than 15 m in length.
The connection must be implemented with the 2m supplied cable. With
H) three-pole circuit-breakers Ne+ and Ne- poles of connector X (or XV) must
be short-circuited if the external neutral is not present.
I) Mandatory if any Ekip module is present.
Only for withdrawable circuit breakers as an alternative to diagrams
31-32-33.
J)
NOTE: Ekip Fan 24VDC occupies the space of the Ekip Supply and
of a Module slot in the terminal box.
Only for withdrawable circuit breakers as an alternative to the diagrams
31-32-33.
K)
NOTE: Ekip Fan 220VAC occupies the space of the Ekip Supply and
two Module slots in the terminal box.
In the presence of diagram 32, up to three applications can be provided
between diagrams 41… 58 taken only once. In addition, it is possible to
L)
duplicate an Ekip Com module that may be selected choosing between
diagrams 61...66.
In the presence of diagram 33, up to three applications can be provided
M) between diagrams 41… 58 taken only once. It is possible to duplicate the
selected Ekip Com module choosing between diagrams 61...66.
In the presence of diagram 34, only one application among diagrams 41…
N)
58 can be provided.
In the presence of multiple Ekip Com modules with circuit-breakers in
O) withdrawable version, the contact S75I/5 must be connected only once on
a single module.
The auxiliary voltage Uaux allows all the functions of the EKIP electronic
protection releases to be activated “Galvanically separated converters”
conforming to standard IEC 60950 (UL 1950) or the equivalent standards,
P)
able to guarantee current in the common mode or leakage current (see IEC
478/1, CEI 22/3) that is no more than 3.5 mA (IEC 60364-41 and CEI 64-8)
must be used since the Uaux must be isolated from the earth.
Q) The maximum length of the cable for the local bus is 15 metres.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Electronic accessories
1 - Ekip Supply modules
Description The Ekip Supply is a power supply accessory module.
There are two types, depending on the input voltages to be supplied:

• Ekip Supply 24-48Vdc.
• Ekip Supply 110-240Vac/dc.
It performs three functions:

• Supply insulated 24 V DC auxiliary power to the release.
• Supply 24 V DC non-insulated power to the electronic accessories mounted on the
terminal box.
• Act as a bridge for the Local Bus, between the release and the electronic accessories
mounted on the terminal box.
Compatibility The modules can be installed in the presence of Ekip Dip, Ekip Touch, Ekip Hi-Touch, Ekip
G-Touch, and Ekip G-Hi-Touch releases.
Electrical characteristics The following table lists the electrical characteristics:
Power supply
Module Frequency Power input
voltages
Ekip Supply
21.5…53 V DC - Maximum 10W
24-48Vdc.
Ekip Supply
105…265 V DC/AC 45…66 Hz Maximum 10 W/VA
110-240Vac/dc
162 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 1 - Ekip Supply modules
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Connections The modules must be mounted on the terminal box of the circuit-breaker or of the fixed part of
the withdrawable circuit-breaker, in the first free slot.
The wiring diagram is included below:
61 71 81 91 01
51 95 35 R1 V3 Vn Ge Szi Ne- 45 D1 C1 C11 C21 11 21 31 41
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
52 96 36 U1 R2 V2 Rct Ge- Szo W3 K1 Ne 46 C3 C13 12 22 32 42
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
54 98 38 U2 V1 Gzo Szc Gzi W4 K2 Rca 48 D2 C2 C12 C22 14 24 34 44
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
S51 S33 M YR Trip Unit I/O EKIP Supply TU YU YC
RTC YO2 YO YC2 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q5..Q10 EKIP Signalling 4K I/O
Module Module Module
32
+/L
-/N
A4 Uaux.
110-240VAC/DC
24-48VDC
X K1 K2
XV K1 K2
K1
K2
Ekip Supply 110-240VAC/DC

Ekip Supply 24-48VDC
A3 K51
SUPPLY
W4
W3
XV W3 W4
X W3 W4
A4 Q)
*
(A) (B)
W2 (LOCAL BUS)
* A), * I)
Diagrams 32
Further information is available on page 156, or on the site http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/

DownloadCenter/, where the wiring diagram is available 1SDM000091R0001.
Signallings The following table illustrates the possible signals, and their meaning:
Pos. Description
A • Off: power supply absent.
• On fixed: power supply present.
163 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 1 - Ekip Supply modules
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 - Ekip Measuring modules
Description The Ekip Measuring is an accessory module for measurement of voltage, power and energy.
Specifically:
• It measures the RMS value and frequency of the voltages of the three-phase system on the
internal contacts of the circuit-breaker, or on the external sockets. From these measurements,
the release obtains those of the power and energy, which therefore become available.
• Combined with the Ekip Synchrocheck module, it makes it possible to recognise whether
the synchronism conditions exist between the internal contacts (or external sockets) and
external contacts necessary for closing the circuit-breaker.
There are two possible types:

• Ekip Measuring, that includes only the measurement function (see the chapter "15 -
Measuring Measurements, on page 130).
• Ekip Measuring Pro, with a measurement function, the possibility of powering the release, and
activation of the Measuring protections (see the chapter "10 - Measuring Pro protections”,
on page 96).
With the Ekip Measuring Pro module, the power supply of the release is guaranteed, if at least
one phase-to-phase voltage is greater than or equal to 80 V AC.
Compatibility and power supply The Ekip Measuring and the Ekip Measuring Pro module can be installed with an Ekip Touch
release, the former if you only wish to implement the measurement function and the latter if you
also wish to implemented the power supply function and activate the Measuring protections
With Ekip Hi-Touch, G Touch, and G Hi-Touch releases, Ekip Measuring Pro is provided as
standard.
The Ekip Measuring module requires the release to be powered with an auxiliary voltage (for
example, supplied by an Ekip Supply module). The auxiliary power supply is not necessary with
Ekip Measuring Pro.
Electrical characteristics The following table lists the electrical characteristics of the modules:
Component Characteristics
Phase-to-phase input voltage 0…760 V AC
Frequency in input 30…80 Hz
164 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 2 - Ekip Measuring modules
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Isolation transformer If the input phase-to-phase voltage supplied to the modules is greater than nominal 690 V AC
(maximum 760 V AC), external socket-outlets must be used.
In the presence of external socket-outlets, the use of an isolation transformer is mandatory.
The following table lists the specifications that the transformer must have:
Characteristics Description
• Mounting: EN 50022 DIN43880 guide.
• Material: self-extinguishing thermoplastic.
Mechanical • Protection class: IP30.
• Electrostatic protection: with screen to be connected to
earth.
• Precision class: ≤ 0.5.
• Performance: ≥ 10 VA.
• Overload: 20 % permanent.
Electrical • Insulations: 4 kV between inputs and outputs, 4 kV
between screen and outputs, 4 kV between screen and
inputs.
• Frequency: 45…66 Hz.
Measurements The following table lists the measurement precision for the modules:
Quantity Interval Accuracy

Phase-to-phase voltage (1) 100…1150 V AC ± 0.5 % @ 45…66 Hz
Frequency (2) 30…80 Hz ± 0.1 % (3)
(1)
With phase-to-phase voltage V greater than nominal 690 AC (maximum 760 V AC), in the presence of
external socket-outlets and an isolation transformer.
(2)
The measurement of the frequency is started up with a measured phase-to-phase voltage ≥ 36 V AC,
and is stopped with a measured phase-to-phase voltage ≤ 32 V AC.
(3)
In the absence of harmonic distortion.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Connections The modules must be mounted directly on the Mainboard, to the right of the release. In parallel
they are connected to a connector, to which the phase and neutral voltages arrive on the
internal contacts of the circuit-breaker, or on the external sockets.
IMPORTANT: in the case of dielectric tests, you need to disconnect the modules
as illustrated in the assembly diagram, and to disconnect the external socket-
outlets from the terminal box. It is not necessary to remove the modules.
Wiring diagrams for the modules are provided below, with and without an isolation transformer:
61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
S51 S33 M YR Trip Unit I/O TU YU YC
Module Module Module EKIP Supply
20 21 22 23
N PE N L1L2 L3 TU1
L1 L2 L3 A1 a1
B1 b1
A2 a2
GS B2 b2
A4 3~
A3 a3
B3 b3
* E)
X VN V3 V2 V1 VN V3 V2 V1 VN V3 V2 V1 VN V3 V2 V1
XV VN V3 V2 V1 VN V3 V2 V1 VN V3 V2 V1 VN V3 V2 V1
N L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1L2 L3
A1
Ekip Measuring Pro
Ekip Measuring Pro

Ekip Measuring Pro
Ekip Measuring Pro

Ekip Measuring
Ekip Measuring
Ekip Measuring
K51 K51 K51 K51
MEAS MEAS MEAS MEAS
XV
X
A4
Diagrams 20 - 21 - 22 - 23

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Access from the display With the release energized, the presence of the modules activates the following on the display:
• Additional graphical pages, that display measurements.
• Additional menus.
The additional graphical pages are:

• A summary of the measurements in progress (maximum phase current, maximum phase-
to-phase voltage, power factor, and the active, reactive and apparent power), accessible
from the page Histograms (see page 61).
• The indicators of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage and of the active, reactive and
apparent power, accessible by selecting the pages Measuring instruments (see page 63).
• The measurements of the phase and phase-to-phase voltages, and of the active, reactive
and apparent power, as well as the energy meters, accessible by selecting the pages
Measurements (see page 64).
• The history of the minimum and maximum phase-to-phase voltages and maximum and
mean powers, accessible from the menu Measurements (see page 72).
• The wave forms and the harmonics of the phase-to-phase voltages, accessible from the
menu Measurements.
The additional menus allow you to:

• Configure the protections activated by Ekip Measuring Pro.
• Configure the modules.
• Display the measurements associated to the modules (in addition to those displayed in
the graphical pages).
• Display information on the modules.
The following table illustrates the path from the display to access the configuration parameters
of the protections activated by the Ekip Measuring Pro module:
…
IU Protection
RC Protection (1)
Protection UV
Protection UV2
Protection OV
Protection OV2
Protection RV
Protection VU
Protection UF
Protection UF2
Protection OF
Advanced
Protection OF2
Protection ROCOF
Protection RP
Protection RQ
Protection OP
Protection OQ
Protection UP
Syncrocheck Protection
Phase Sequence
Signallings
Cos φ
Current thresholds
…
(1)
Protection available with Rating Plug RC and Ekip Measuring Pro modules, and external differential toroid
or RC (see the menu Settings, Circuit-breaker, Earth protection), and alternative to the Gext protection (see
the Protections menu).
NOTE: selecting a protection opens the list of parameters that can be set for the
selected protection. For details on the protections, see chapters “10 - Measuring Pro
protections” on page 96, and the chapter "11 - Hi-Touch protections” on page 102.
The following table illustrates the path from the display for viewing the measurements and
commands activated by the modules and accessible from the menus:
…
Events
…
I Max
U Min
U Max
History P Max
Measurements P Mean
Q Max
Q Mean
S Max
S Mean
Reset
Measurements
Measurement interval
Measurements Power factor
Frequency
Energy meters
Energy Reset Meters
Energy RESET
Peak Factor
Harmonic distortion
Ekip Synchrocheck
…
Counters
…
Network Analyzer Ne
Wave forms Voltage 12
Voltage 23
Voltage 31
Maintenance
The following table illustrates the measurements and commands accessible from the menus:
Measurement or
Description
control
Shows the history of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage
U Min
measurements in the form of a histogram (see page 75).
Shows the history of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage
U Max
measurements in the form of a histogram (see page 75).
Shows the history of the maximum active power measurements in
P Max
the form of a histogram (see page 75).
Shows the history of the average active power measurements in the
P Mean
form of a histogram (see page 75).
Shows the history of the maximum reactive power measurements in
Q Max
Shows the history of the mean active power measurements in the
Q Mean
Shows the history of the maximum apparent power measurements in
S Max
Shows the history of the mean apparent power measurements in the
S Mean
Power factor Shows the value of the power factor.
Energy meters Shows the values of active, reactive and apparent energy.
Reset Meters Resets the energy meters.
Opens a list of the parameters for programming the resetting of the
Energy RESET
energy counters (see page 72 ).
Shows the wave form of the phase-to-phase voltage U12, acquired
Voltage 12
at the moment of selection (see page 76).
Voltage 23
Voltage 31
The following table illustrates the path for accessing the configuration parameters of the
modules from the display:
…
Network frequency
Local/Remote
Local Bus
…
Voltage Transformer
Settings Rated voltage
Modules
Ekip Measuring Primary voltage
Secondary voltage
Flow of power
…
Function
Power Controller
…
The following table illustrates configuration parameters of the modules:
Parameter Values Default Description

• Absent = Isolation
transformer on the supply side
of the inputs of the module is
Voltage absent.
Absent, Present Absent
Transformer • Present = Isolation
transformer on the supply side
of the inputs of the module is
present.
100 V, 115 V, 120 V, 190 V,
Displayed with Voltage
208 V, 220 V, 230 V, 240 V,
Rated Transformer set as absent,
277 V, 347 V, 380 V, 400 V, 100 V
voltage the rated voltage of the
415 V, 440 V, 480 V, 500 V,
installation.
550 V, 600 V, 660 V, 690 V
100 V, 115 V, 120 V, 190 V,
208 V, 220 V, 230 V, 240 V, Displayed with Voltage
Primary 277 V, 347 V, 380 V, 400 V, Transformer set as present,
100 V
voltage 415 V, 440 V, 480 V, 500 V, the primary voltage of the
550 V, 600 V, 660 V, 690 V, isolation transformer.
910 V, 950 V, 1000 V, 1150 V
Displayed with Voltage
Secondary 100 V, 110 V, 115 V, 120 V, Transformer set as present,
100 V
voltage 200 V, 230 V the secondary voltage of the
isolation transformer.
• Low->High = Flow of power
from low terminals to high
terminals of the circuit-breaker
Flow of (load connected high).
Low->High, High->Low Low->High
power • High->Low = Flow of power
from high terminals to the low
terminals the circuit-breaker
(load connected low).
The following table illustrates the path from the display for displaying information on the
modules:
Protection unit
Circuit-breaker
Information …
Modules Ekip Measuring
…
Power Controller
The items of information on the modules that can be displayed are the serial number and the
version ("Basic" in the case of Ekip Measuring, "Pro" in the case of Ekip Measuring Pro).
A
Pos. Description
Power status LED, green; present only on the Ekip Measuring Pro. The
possible states are:
A • Off: the power supplied by the Ekip Measuring Pro to the release is absent.
• On fixed: the power supplied by the Ekip Measuring Pro to the release is
present.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
3 - Ekip Synchrocheck module
Description The Ekip Synchrocheck is an accessory module that, combined with the Ekip Measuring or
Ekip Measuring Pro module serves to recognize whether the synchronism conditions exist
between the internal and external contacts of the circuit-breaker, necessary for closing the
circuit-breaker.
The Ekip Synchrocheck module measures the voltage on the external contacts (external
voltage), while the Ekip Measuring or the Ekip Measuring Pro module measures that on the
internal contacts (internal voltage). With a generator, and the circuit-breaker in "Standard"
configuration, the external voltage is the line voltage, and the internal voltage is that of the
generator.
There are two types of operation:

• With the Bar live, if the external voltage is different to zero.
• With the Bar dead, if one of the voltages is null (external with "Standard" configuration,
internal with "Reversed" configuration).
With Bar live:
• The search for the synchronism is started if the external voltage is greater than or equal
to a minimum (0.5 Un by default), for a minimum time (1 s by default).
• Synchronism is considered to be reached if the differences between the RMS values of
the frequency and the voltage phases are less than or equal to a maximum (0.12 Un, 0.1
Hz and 50 ° by default).
Instead, with the Bar dead, and "Standard" configuration:
• The search for the synchronism is started if the internal voltage is greater than or equal to
a minimum (0.5 Un by default), for a minimum time (1 s by default).
• The synchronism is considered to be reached if the external voltage is less than or equal
to a maximum (0.2 by default) for a minimum time (1 s by default).
With Bar dead, and "Reversed" configuration, the roles of the internal and external voltages
are inverted.
To the above-mentioned synchronism conditions, we can add that of circuit-breaker open (by
enabling the condition “evaluate CB status”, disabled by default).
The frequency and phase controls can be disabled.
IMPORTANT: to be able to disable frequency and phase controls, make sure

that the correspondence of the desired frequency and phase already exists
between external and internal contacts.
The synchronism signal is activated when the synchronism is reached, and is kept active for at
least 200 ms. After 200 ms, it is kept active while the synchronism is present, and deactivated
when the synchronism falls, or the circuit-breaker is open (with condition "Evaluate CB Status"
enabled), or the communication with the release is interrupted.
Lastly, the Ekip Synchrocheck module makes the pins of a contact (K S1 and K S2) available
on the terminal box. Depending on how the module is configured, this contact is either normally
open or closed, and changes status when synchronism is achieved.
IMPORTANT: only one Ekip Synchrocheck module can be installed on the

same circuit-breaker.
Compatibility and power supply The module can be installed in the presence of Ekip Touch, Hi-Touch, G Touch, and G Hi-Touch
releases, and requires the presence of an Ekip Supply module in the first slot of the circuit-
breaker terminal box.
171 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Synchrocheck module
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Electrical characteristics The following table lists the electrical characteristics of the module:
Input voltage 0...120 V AC nominal
Frequency in input 30…80 Hz
• Maximum switching power (1): 1250 VA.
• Maximum switching voltage (1): 150V DC / 250 V AC.
• Breaking power (1): 2 A @ 30 V DC, 0.8 A @ 50 V DC, 0.2 A @
Output contact
150 V DC, 4A @ 250V AC.
• Dielectric strength between open contacts: 2000 V AC (1 minute
@ 50 Hz).
(1)
Data relating to a resistive load.
Isolation transformer Between the external contacts of the circuit-breaker and the inputs of the module, an isolation
transformer must always be installed that has the characteristics listed in the following table:
Characteristics Description
• Mounting: EN 50022 DIN43880 guide.
• Material: self-extinguishing thermoplastic.
Mechanical
• Protection class: IP30.
• Electrostatic protection: with screen to be connected to earth.
• Precision class: ≤ 0.5.
• Performance: ≥ 5 VA.
• Overload: 20 % permanent.
Electrical
• Insulations: 4 kV between inputs and outputs, 4 kV between
screen and outputs, 4 kV between screen and inputs.
• Frequency: 45…66 Hz.
Measurements The following table lists the measurement precision for the module:
Quantity Interval Accuracy

Voltage 10…120 V AC ± 1 % (1)
Frequency (2) 30…80 Hz ± 0.1 % (3)
Phase (4) -180...+180 ° ±1°
(1)
With Bar live
(2)
With a live Bar, the measurement of the frequency is started up with a measured voltage ≥ 36 V AC, and
is stopped with a measured voltage ≤ 32 V AC.
(3) In the absence of harmonic distortion.
(4)
The phase measurement refers to the difference in phase between internal and external voltage.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Connections The module must be mounted on the terminal box of the circuit-breaker or of the fixed part of
the withdrawable circuit-breaker, in the first free slot after the Ekip Supply module.
The wiring diagram of the module is included below:
61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
S51 S33 M YR Trip Unit I/O Module Module Module EKIP Supply TU YU YC
48
TU2
L1 L2
A a
B b
A4
X KS1 VS2 VS1
XV KS1 VS2 VS1
KS1
VS1
VS2
Ekip Synchrocheck
A3
K51 O SC
SYNC
KS2
XV KS2
X KS2
A4
* L), * M)
Diagram 48

Pos. Description
• Off: power supply absent.
• On fixed: power supply and communication with the release present (with a
release with the Alive LED option disabled).
• On, with one flash per second (synchronized with that of the green LED on
A
the release): power supply and communication with release present (with a
release with the Alive LED option enabled).
B A • On, with two quick flashes per second (not synchronized with those of the
green LED on the release): power supply present, and communication with
release absent (for example, because Local Bus disabled).
LED O SC, green. The possible states are:
• Off: contact K open (with contact normally open, synchronization KO; with
B contact normally closed, synchronization OK) (1).
• On fixed: contact K closed (with contact normally open, synchronization OK;
with contact normally closed, synchronization KO) (1).
(1)
For the configuration of the contact, see page 176.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Access from the display With the module energized, and the Local Bus enabled, the presence of the module on the
terminal box activates additional menus on the display :
• To configure the synchronism function.
• To display the measurements related to the function (voltage, frequency, and phase).
• To configure the module.
• To display information on the module and synchronism status.
To enable the Local Bus, you need to select "On" in the menu Settings, Modules, Local Bus.
The configuration parameters of the synchronism function are different depending on whether
the dead Bar option is enabled or not.
The following table illustrates the path from the display for accessing configuration parameters
of the function, and the parameters available with dead Bar disabled:
…
Protection UP
Enable
Delta U Threshold
Advanced U Live Threshold
Syncrocheck Protection
Delta Frequency
Delta Phase
Dead Bus Option (Off)
Signallings
…
The following table illustrates the path from the display for accessing configuration parameters
of the function, and the parameters available with dead Bar enabled:
…
Protection UP
Enable
U Dead Threshold
Advanced
Syncrocheck Protection U Live Threshold
Dead Bus Option (On)
Dead Bus Config
Signallings
…
NOTE: the module can also be configured the Ekip Connect application (see the
chapter "13 - Other accessories", and the paragraph "Ekip Connect application" on
page 221).
ABB | SACE Emax 2
The following table illustrates the configuration parameters of the synchronism function:

• Off = Function disabled.
Enable Off, On Off
• On = Function enabled
0.02...0,12 Un With Bar live, 1 a synchronism condition: maximum difference
Delta U Threshold 0.12 Un
in steps of 0.001 Un between internal and external voltage.
0.05...0.20 Un With Bar dead, and "Standard" configuration, 1 a synchronism
U Dead Threshold 0.2 Un
in steps of 0.001 Un condition: maximum external voltage (1).
Minimum voltage in order to start up monitoring of the voltages (2):
0.5...1.1 Un • With Bar live, external under-voltage.
U Live Threshold 0.5 Un
in steps of 0.001 Un • With Bar dead, and "Standard" configuration, internal under-
voltage (1).
stability voltage time 1000...30000 ms Time minimum in which the condition must be satisfied “U Live
1000 ms
for live state (3) in steps of 1 ms Threshold”, to start up monitoring of the voltages.
0.1...1.0 Hz With Bar live, 2 a synchronism condition: maximum difference
Delta Frequency 0.1 Hz
in steps of 0.1 Hz between internal and external frequency.
5…50 ° With Bar live, 3 a synchronism condition: maximum difference
Delta Phase 50 °
in steps of 5 ° between internal and external phase.
With the Bar live, the minimum time within which the “Delta Phase”
condition must be satisfied: this is not a synchronism condition,
minimum matching 100...3000 ms
100 ms but a parameter that allows you to discriminate between correct
Time (3) in steps of 10 ms
combinations, rather than the “Delta Frequency” and “Delta Phase”
conditions.
• Off = Bar live.
Dead Bus Option Off, On Off
• On = Bar dead.
With Bar live, “Delta Frequency” condition:
Frequency Check (3) (4)
ON, OFF ON • OFF = Disabled.
• ON = Enabled.
With Bar live, “Delta Phase” condition:
Phase Check (3) (4)
ON, OFF ON • OFF = Disabled.
• ON = Enabled.
Circuit-breaker open condition (With Bar live 4 a synchronism
condition, With Bar dead 2 a synchronism condition):
evaluate CB status (3) NO, YES NO
• NO = Disabled.
• YES = Enabled.
With Bar dead, and generator:
• Reversed = Ekip Synchrocheck/external contacts connected to
Dead Bus Config Reversed, Standard Standard the generator (1).
• Standard = Ekip Synchrocheck/external contacts connected to
the network.
(1)
With Bar dead, and "Reversed" configuration, the roles of the internal and external voltages are inverted.
(2)
On the condition of minimum voltage, a hysteresis of 10% is applied: once reached, the condition is lost if the voltage drops below 90% of the set
limit.
(3)
Parameter available only with the Ekip Connect application.
(4)
If the Frequency Check is disabled ("OFF"), the Phase Check is also Off, but not vice versa.
The following table illustrates the path from the display for viewing the measurements related
to the synchronism function:
…
Harmonic distortion
Measurements
Ekip Synchrocheck
Network Analyzer
…
The following table illustrates the measurements related to the synchronism function:
Configuration Measurement Description

Ext Side Voltage Voltage measured by Ekip Synchrocheck.
Int Side Voltage Voltage measured by Ekip Measuring (1).
With Bar live Ext Side Frequency Frequency measured by Ekip Synchrocheck.
Int Side Frequency Frequency measured by Ekip Measuring (1).
Phase Difference Phase difference between the voltages.
With Bar Ext Side Voltage Voltage measured by Ekip Synchrocheck.
dead Int Side Voltage Voltage measured by Ekip Measuring (1).
(1)
For the characteristics of the voltage and frequency (internal) measurements of the Ekip Measuring, refer
to those of the Ekip Measuring module (see page 165).
module from the display:
…
Network frequency
Local/Remote
Local Bus
…
Primary Voltage
Settings
Modules Secondary Voltage
Ekip Synchrocheck
Concatenated Ref
NO Contact
…
Function
Power Controller
…
The following table illustrates configuration parameters of the module:

100 V, 115 V, 120 V, 190 V,
208 V, 220 V, 230 V, 240 V,
277 V, 347 V, 380 V, 400 V, Primary voltage of the
Primary Voltage 100 V
415 V, 440 V, 480 V, 500 V, isolation transformer.
550 V, 600 V, 660 V, 690 V,
910 V, 950 V, 1000 V, 1150 V
Secondary Secondary voltage of the
100 V, 110 V, 115 V, 120 V 100 V
Voltage isolation transformer.
Concatenated Input phase-to-phase voltage
V12, V23, V31 V12
Ref to the module.
Status of the contact:
NO Contact No, Yes Yes • No = Normally closed.
• Yes = Normally open.
The following table illustrates the path from the display to view information on the module and
synchronism status:
Protection unit
Circuit-breaker
Information …
Modules Ekip Synchrocheck
…
Power Controller
The information that can be displayed is as follows:

• The serial number and the software version.
• The overall synchronism status (“Ok” or “Not OK”).
• The correspondence between the voltage, frequency, and phase values (“Ok” or “Not OK”).
ABB | SACE Emax 2
4 - Ekip Signalling 4K module
Description The Ekip Signalling 4K is a signalling accessory module.
The module has:

• Four contacts for output signals.
• Four digital inputs.
• A power status LED, and eight signalling LEDs (one LED for every output/input).
NOTE: for the access to outputs and inputs, see the paragraph "Connections" on
page 179. For the location of the LEDs, see the paragraph “Signallings”, on page
184.
To switch the state of an input, a short circuit must be created between the input, and a
reference available on the same terminal box. In parallel, the information on the state of the
inputs is transmitted by the module to the release, that can be programmed so that the
activation of an input corresponds to an action on the part of the release.
Instead, the closing or the opening of the contacts is commanded by the release, which can
be programmed so that the closing/opening corresponds to the occurrence of a desired event
or combination of events.
The signalling LEDs light up in the presence of the short circuit for the inputs, or by closing the
contact for the outputs.
Compatibility and power supply The module can be installed in the presence of Ekip Touch, Hi-Touch, G Touch, and G Hi-Touch
releases, and requires the presence of an Ekip Supply module in the first slot of the circuit-
breaker terminal box.
Electrical characteristics The following table lists the electrical characteristics of the outputs of the module:
Output • Breaking power (1): 2 A @ 30 V DC, 0.8 A @ 50 V DC, 0.2 A @ 150 V DC,
contacts 4A @ 250V AC.
• Dielectric strength between open contacts: 2000 V AC (1 minute @ 50
Hz).
(1)
178 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 4 - Ekip Signalling 4K module
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Connections The module must be mounted directly on the Mainboard, to the left of the release. The outputs
and inputs of the module are therefore accessible from the terminal box of the circuit-breaker.
61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
S51 S33 M YR Trip Unit I/O EKIP Supply TU YU YC
Module Module Module
A4
X K3 K4 K5 K6 H1 H2 H3 H4 HC
XV K3 K4 K5 K6 H1 H2 H3 H4 HC
HC
H1
H2
H3
K6
H4
K3
K5
K4
Ekip Signalling 4K
A1
K51 O 01 O 02 O 03 O 04 I 01 I 02 I 03 I 04
SIGN
K10
HC
HC
K9
K7
K8
XV K7 K8 K9 K10 HC HC
X K7 K8 K9 K10 HC HC
A4
Diagram 2

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Access from the display To configure the module the release must be on. Then the presence of the module activates
the additional menus on the display:
• In order to configure the inputs and output contacts.
• To display information on the module and the state of inputs and outputs.
module from the display:
…
Network frequency
Local/Remote
Local Bus
…
Polarity
I 01
Delay
I 02 (1)
I 03 (1)
I 04 (1)
Settings Signal source

Modules
Ekip Signalling 4K Delay
O 01 Contact Type
Self-latching
min Activation Time
O 02 (2)
O 03 (2)
O 04 (2)
…
Function
Power Controller
…
(1)
Like the menu I 01.
(2)
Like the menu O 01.
NOTE: the module can also be configured the Ekip Connect application (see the
chapter "13 - Other accessories", and the paragraph "Ekip Connect application" on
page 221).
The following table illustrates configuration parameters of the inputs:
Parameter Selectable values Default Description

• Active open = To be considered
active, the input must be floating.
Active open, Active Active
Polarity • Active closed = To be considered
closed closed
active, the input must be connected
to its reference.
Standby time after that the input
has changed state, before the
change of state is recognised (if the
00…100.00 s input is reset before a time equal to
Delay 0.01 s
in steps of 0.01 s the delay has elapsed, the change
of state is nor recognised). If 0.00
s is selected, the value 300 μs is
assigned to the parameter.
The following table illustrates configuration parameters of the outputs:

• None
• Prealarm L
• Delay L
• Delay S
• Opening L
• Opening S
The event that the output must activate, that is,
• Opening G
Signal with which the contact must be:
• Opening I None
source • Closed, if set as NO.
• Every opening
• Open, if set as NC.
• Every alarm
• Load LC1 (1)
• Load LC2 (1)
• CB Open
• CB Close
• Custom (2)
Standby time after the selected event has taken
place, and before the output is activated (if the
00…100.00 s event disappears before a time equal to the delay
Delay 0.00 s
in steps of 0.01 s has passed, the output is not activated). If 0.00 s
is selected, the value 300 μs is assigned to the
parameter.
Contact • NO = Contact normally open.
NO, NC NO
Type • NC = Contact normally closed.
• Off = The output is deactivated when the event
disappears.
• On = When the event disappears, the output is
Self- kept active for the minimum time selected.
Off, On Off
latching
IMPORTANT: if the output is used for the
Power Controller function, self-latching
must not be enabled.
The "Power Controller" value must be selected
if the output is used for the Power Controller
function (see the chapter "21 - Ekip Power
Controller", on page 151). The output is then
kept active for a fixed time dictated by the
function, independently of the persistence of the
event that activated it.
min 0 ms, 100 ms, On the contrary, with self-latching enabled, the
Activation 200 ms, Power 0 ms minimum time in which the output is kept active
Time Controller (once the selected time has elapsed, the output
is kept active as long as the event that activated
it persists).
IMPORTANT: if the output is not used

for the Power Controller function, the
“Power Controller” value must not be
selected.
(1)
For the sources Load LC1 and Load LC2, see the chapter "9 - Touch protections", and the paragraph "
Current thresholds”, on page 91.
(2)
The Custom source is a combination of default events, that can be modified using the Ekip Connect
application so as to make the closing/opening of the contact correspond to a wide range of combinations
of the status bits of the release.
The following table illustrates the path from the display for accessing information on the module:
Protection unit
Circuit-breaker
Information …
Modules Ekip Signalling 4K
…
Power Controller
The information on the module that can be displayed is as follows:

• The logical state of the inputs (“Off” if not active, “On” if active).
• The state of the output contacts (“Open” if open, “Closed” if closed).
The following tables illustrate the paths from the display to access the pages for programming
the actions you wish the release to perform in the event of an input being activated.
NOTE: the selection of an action opens a list of the programming parameters, that
is, a list of the events for which the action can be performed, and the delay. For details
on the parameters, see the chapter “19 - Operating features, and the paragraph "
Functional specifications, on page 148.
…
Advanced
Current thresholds
Function Trip RESET
…
Frequency
Energy meters
Measurements
Energy (1)
Reset Meters
Energy RESET
Peak Factor
…
(1)
Menu available with Ekip Measuring or Ekip Measuring Pro modules.
…
Earth protection
Circuit-breaker
Function External Trip
Installation
Network frequency
…
Switch On LOCAL
Settings
Modules Signalling RESET
Function
YO Command
YC Command
Power Controller
…
System
Function Switch On SET B
Maintenance
The following table describes the programmable actions on the release:
Action Description
Trip RESET Reset of the opening signal.
Resetting the energy counters (see the chapter "15 - Measuring
Energy RESET Measurements", and the paragraph "Energy meters", on page
135).
External Trip Opening of the circuit-breaker.
Switching of the connection from remote to local (see the
Switch On LOCAL chapter "6 - Menu", and the paragraph "Settings Menu", on
page 69).
Signalling RESET Reset of the signals.
YO Command Tripping of the opening coil.
YC Command Tripping of the closing coil.
Switching the protections from configuration A to configuration
Switch On SET B B (see the chapter "11 - Hi-Touch protections", and the
paragraph "Set A-B", on page 108).
ABB | SACE Emax 2
NOTE: for the references of contacts and inputs, see the paragraph “Connections”,
on page 179.
A
Pos. Name Description
B
C A - • Off: power supply absent.
D • On fixed: power supply present.
E LED for signalling the state of contact the K3 - K7, green. The possible
F states are:
B O 01
G • Off: contact open.
H
• On fixed: contact closed.
I
LED for signalling the state of contact the K4 - K8, green. The possible
states are:
C O 02
• Off: contact open.
LED for signalling the state of the contact K5 - K9, green. The possible
states are:
D O 03
LED for signalling the state of the contact K6 - K10, green. The possible
states are:
E O 04
LED for signalling the physical state of the input H1, green. The possible
states are:
F I 01
• Off: floating input.
• On fixed: input short-circuited on HC.
states are:
H I 02
states are:
G I 03
states are:
I I 04
ABB | SACE Emax 2
5 - Ekip Signalling 2K modules
Description The Ekip Signalling 2K is a signalling accessory module.
The module has:

• Two digital inputs, and two contacts for output signals.
• A power status LED, and four signalling LEDs (one LED for every input/output).
NOTE: for the positioning of inputs, outputs and LEDs, see the paragraph “Signals
and inputs/outputs”, on page 192.
To switch the state of an input, a short circuit must be created between the input, and a
reference available on the same connector. In parallel, the information on the state of the inputs
is transmitted by the module to the release, that can be programmed so that the activation of
an input corresponds to an action on the part of the release.
Instead, the closing or the opening of the contacts is commanded by the release, which can
be programmed so that the closing/opening corresponds to the occurrence of a desired event
or combination of events.
The signalling LEDs light up in the presence of the short circuit for the inputs, or by closing the
contact for the outputs.
IMPORTANT: a maximum of three Ekip Signalling 2K modules can be installed

on the same circuit breaker: one 2K-1, one 2K-2, and one 2K-3. These modules
differ by name and label, and have different wiring, but they are identical in
terms of characteristics and manner of installation.
Compatibility and power supply The modules can be installed in the presence of Ekip Touch, Hi-Touch, G Touch, and G Hi-
Touch releases, and require the presence of an Ekip Supply module in the first slot of the
circuit-breaker terminal box.
Electrical characteristics The following table lists the electrical characteristics of the modules:
• Breaking power (1): 2 A @ 30 V DC, 0.8 A @ 50 V DC, 0.2 A @
Output contacts
150 V DC, 4A @ 250V AC.
• Dielectric strength between open contacts: 2000 V AC (1 minute
@ 50 Hz).
(1)
185 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 5 - Ekip Signalling 2K modules
ABB | SACE Emax 2
The wiring diagrams for the modules are included below:
61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
41 42 43
A4
X K11 K13 H11 H12 HC1 K21 K23 H21 H22 HC2 K31 K33 H31 H32 HC3
XV K11 K13 H11 H12 HC1 K21 K23 H21 H22 HC2 K31 K33 H31 H32 HC3
HC1
H11
K11
HC2
HC3
H21
H31
K21
K31
H12
K13
H22
H32
K23
K33
Ekip Signalling 2K-1

A3
K51 O 11 O 12 I 11 I 12 K51 O 21 O 22 I 21 I 22 K51 O 31 O 32 I 31 I 32
SIGN SIGN SIGN
K12
K14
K22
K32
K24
K34
XV K12 K14 K22 K24 K32 K34
X K12 K14 K22 K24 K32 K34
A4
* L), * M) * L), * M) * L), * M)
Diagrams 41 - 42 - 43

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Access from the display With the modules energized, and the Local Bus enabled, the presence of the modules on the
terminal box activates additional menus on the display:
• In order to configure the inputs and output contacts.
• To display information on the modules and the state of inputs and outputs.
…
Network
frequency
Local/Remote
Local Bus
…
Signal source
I 01
Delay
I 02 (1)
Signal source
Ekip Signalling Delay
Settings 2K-1 Contact Type
Modules O 01
Self-latching
min Activation
Time
O 02 (2)
Ekip Signalling (3)

2K-2
Ekip Signalling (3)
2K-3
…
Function
Power
Controller
…
(1)
Like menu I 01.
(2)
Like menu O 01.
(3)
Like menu Signalling 2K-1.
NOTE: the modules can also be configured with the Ekip Connect application (see
the chapter “13 - Other accessories", and the paragraph "Ekip Connect application"
on page 221).
The following table illustrates configuration parameters of the outputs:

• None
• Prealarm L
• Delay L
• Delay S
• Opening L
• Opening S
The event that the output must activate,
• Opening G
Signal that is, with which the contact must be:
• Opening I None
source • Closed, if set as NO.
• Every opening
• Open, if set as NC.
• Every alarm
• Load LC1 (1)
• Load LC2 (1)
• CB Open
• CB Close
• Custom (2)
Standby time after the selected event
has taken place, and before the output is
activated (if the event disappears before
00…100.00 s
Delay 0.00 s a time equal to the delay has passed,
in steps of 0.01 s
the output is not activated). If 0.00 s is
selected, the value 300 μs is assigned to
the parameter.
Contact • NO = Contact normally open.
NO, NC NO
Type • NC = Contact normally closed.
• Off = The output is deactivated when
the event disappears.
• On = When the event disappears, the
output is kept active for the minimum time
Self-latching Off, On Off selected.
IMPORTANT: if the output is used

for the Power Controller function,
self-latching must not be enabled.
The "Power Controller" value must be
selected if the output is used for the Power
Controller function (see the chapter "21 -
Ekip Power Controller", on page 151). The
output is then kept active for a fixed time
dictated by the function, independently of
the persistence of the event that activated
it.
min 0 ms, 100 ms,
On the contrary, with self-latching enabled,
Activation 200 ms, Power 0 ms
the minimum time in which the output is
Time Controller
kept active (once the selected time has
elapsed, the output is kept active as long
as the event that activated it persists).
IMPORTANT: if the output is not

used for the Power Controller
function, the “Power Controller”
value must not be selected.
(1)
For the sources Load LC1 and Load LC2, see the chapter "9 - Touch protections", and the paragraph "
Current thresholds”, on page 91.
(2)
The Custom source is a combination of default events, that can be modified using the Ekip Connect
application so as to make the closing/opening of the contact correspond to a wide range of combinations
of the status bits of the release.
The following table illustrates configuration parameters of the inputs:

• Active open = To be considered
active, the input must be floating.
Signal Active open, Active
Active closed • Active closed = To be considered
source closed
active, the input must be connected to
its reference.
Standby time after that the input has
changed state, before the change
of state is recognised (if the input is
00…100.00 s reset before a time equal to the delay
Delay 0.01 s
in steps of 0.01 s has elapsed, the change of state is
nor recognised). If 0.00 s is selected,
the value 300 μs is assigned to the
parameter.
IMPORTANT: if the release is disconnected for at least 8 s, the outputs are

deactivated, except for those programmed to be activated in the case of
disconnection. Normal operation is restored on reconnection.
The following table illustrates the path from the display for accessing information on the
modules:
Protection unit
Circuit-breaker
…
Information Ekip Signalling 2K-1
Modules Ekip Signalling 2K-2
…
Power Controller
The information on the modules that can be displayed is as follows:

• The logical state of the inputs (“Off” if not active, “On” if active).
• The state of the output contacts (“Open” if open, “Closed” if closed).
The following tables illustrate the paths from the display to access the pages for programming
the actions you wish the release to perform in the event of an input being activated.
NOTE: the selection of an action opens a list of the programming parameters, that
is, a list of the events for which the action can be performed, and the delay. For details
on the parameters, see the chapter “19 - Operating features, and the paragraph "
Functional specifications, on page 148.
…
Advanced
Current thresholds
Function Trip RESET
…
Frequency
Energy meters
Measurements
Energy (1)
Reset Meters
Energy RESET
Peak Factor
…
(1)
Menu available with Ekip Measuring or Ekip Measuring Pro modules.
…
Earth protection
Circuit-breaker
Function External Trip
Installation
Network frequency
…
Switch On LOCAL
Settings
Modules Signalling RESET
Function
YO Command
YC Command
Power Controller
…
System
Function Switch On SET B
Maintenance
The following table describes the programmable actions on the release:
Action Description
External Trip Execution of an opening.
Trip Reset Reset of the opening signal.
Switching of the protections, according to the configuration,
Switch on Set B from A to B (see paragraph "Settings Menu", in chapter "6
- Menu").
Switching of the connection from remote to local (see
Switch on Local
paragraph "Set A-B", in chapter "11 - Hi-Touch protections").
Signalling Reset Reset of the signals.
Resetting of the energy meters (see paragraph "Energy
Energy Reset
meters", in chapter "15 - Measuring Measurements").
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Signals and inputs/outputs The following table illustrates the signals, inputs and outputs of the module:
Pos. Name Description

FGH I L • Off: power supply absent.
• On fixed: power supply and communication with the release
present (with a release with the Alive LED option disabled).
• On, with one flash per second (synchronized with that of the
green LED on the release): power supply and communication
A -
with release present (with a release with the Alive LED option
enabled).
• On, with two quick flashes per second (not synchronized
with those of the green LED on the release): power supply
present, and communication with release absent (for example,
because Local Bus disabled) (1).
LED for signalling the physical state of the input H x1, green.
B C D E A The possible states are:
B I x1 (2)
• On fixed: input short-circuited on H Cx.
LED for signalling the physical state of the input H x2, green.
C I x2 (2)
• On fixed: input short-circuited on H Cx.
LED for signalling contact K x1 - K x2, green. The possible
states are:
D O x1 (2)
LED for signalling the state of the contact K x3 - K x4, green.
E O x2 (2)
F H x1 (2) Input I x1.
G H Cx (2) Conductive part of the inputs H x1 and H x2.
H H x2 (2) Input I x1.
I K x1, K x2 (2) Output contact pin O x1.
L K x3, K x4 (2) Output contact pin O x2.
(1)
The absence of communication is signalled immediately by the power LED, unlike the outputs which
(apart from those programmed to be activated in the case of disconnection) are deactivated if the condition
persists for at least 8 s.
(2)
With x = 1, 2, or 3.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
6 - Ekip Com Modbus RS-485 modules
Description The Ekip Com Modbus RS-485 is a communication accessory module, that integrates the
circuit-breaker in an industrial remote supervision and control network.
It can be connected to a RS-485 network with a Modbus RTU communication protocol, and
allows you to:
• Connect the releases to the network, with dialog functionality.
• Command opening and closing of the circuit-breaker remotely.
• Provide information on the state of the circuit-breaker (open, closed, tripped).
• If connected to a circuit-breaker in withdrawable version, detect the connected/extracted.
Remote opening and closing of the circuit-breaker can be performed only if the circuit-breaker
is equipped with an Ekip Com Actuator module (see page 219).
For applications in which a high network reliability is necessary, the module can be installed
along with the corresponding Redundant module.
The Redundant module is identical in terms of specifications and installation methods, but its
wiring is different to the first one.
IMPORTANT: on the same circuit-breaker, a single Ekip Com Modbus RS-485,

and a single Ekip Com Modbus RS-485 Redundant can be installed.
AUP auxiliary contacts The modules are always supplied with dedicated AUP auxiliary position contacts, which in the
case of a withdrawable circuit-breaker supply the inserted/extracted signal of the moving part
from the fixed part.
The assembly assures that the position signalling is also maintained with the moving part
withdrawn.
IMPORTANT: in the presence of multiple communication modules, only one

of these can be connected to the AUP contacts.
Ekip RTC contact The modules are always supplied with an Ekip RTC auxiliary contact, that supplies the release
with the signal indicating circuit-breaker ready to receive a close command.
193 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 6 - Ekip Com Modbus RS-485 modules
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Pos. Description
• On, with one flash per second (synchronized with that of the green LED on the
A
release): power supply and communication with release present (with a release
with the Alive LED option enabled).
• On, with two quick flashes per second (not synchronized with those of the
RX and TX LEDs, green. The possible states are:
B • Off: Modbus RTU communication not active.
B • On, flashing rapidly: Modbus RTU communication active.
A
Termination resistor The modules provide the possibility to insert a 120 Ω termination resistor on the RS-485 bus,
by setting the dip-switches Rterm on the side of the modules, in position on. This option must
be selected before the installation of the modules.
For the positions on and off of the dip-switches Rterm, see the following figure (on Modbus
RS-485 communication modules, the dip-switches Rpol are not used).
1 2 3 4
ON
Figure 88
ABB | SACE Emax 2
61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
51 61
A4
X
XV
* O)
S75I/5
193
194
XK7 1 XK7 2
A3
Ekip Com Modbus RS-485
Ekip Com R Modbus RS-485

K51 K51
COM COM
W1R
W2R
W1
W2
XV W1 W2 W1R W2R
X W1 W2 W1R W2R
A4
* Q) * Q)
(A) (B) (A) (B)
BUS 1 BUS 2
* L), * M) * L), * M)
Diagrams 51 - 61

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Access from the display With the modules powered, and Local Bus enabled, the presence of the modules on the
terminal box activates additional menus on the display, to configure the modules according to
the characteristics of the network.
…
Network frequency
Local/Remote
Local Bus
…
Address
Settings
Modules Ekip Com Modbus RS-485 Baudrate
Protocol
Ekip Com Modbus RS-485 bus *R (1)
…
Function
Power Controller
…
(1)
Like the Ekip Com Modbus RS-485 menu.

• Ekip Com Modbus Address to be assigned to the modules.
RS-485: 247
Address 1… 247 • Ekip Com Modbus IMPORTANT: devices connected
RS-485 Redundant: to the same network must have
246 different addresses.
9600 bit/s,
Baudrate 19200 bit/s Data transmission speed
19200 bit/s
• 8.E,1 = 8 data bits, 1 EVEN parity bit,
1 STOP bit.
• 8.O,1 = 8 data bits, 1 ODD parity bit,
8.E,1, 8.O,1, 1 STOP bit.
Protocol 8,E,1
8.N,2, 8.N,1 • 8.N,2 = 8 data bits, no parity bit, 2
STOP bits.
• 8.N,1 = 8 data bits, no parity bit, 1
STOP bit.
on page 221).
modules:
Protection unit
Circuit-breaker
…
Information
Ekip Com Modbus RS-485
Modules
Ekip Com Modbus RS-485 bus *R
…
Power Controller
ABB | SACE Emax 2
7 - Ekip Com Profibus modules
Description The Ekip Com Profibus is a communication accessory module, that integrates the circuit-
breaker in an industrial remote supervision and control network.
It can be connected to a network RS-485 with protocol of Profibus communication, and allows
of:
• Connect the releases as slaves to the network, with dialog functionality.
IMPORTANT: on the same circuit-breaker, a single Ekip Com Profibus, and a

single Ekip Com Profibus Redundant can be installed.
withdrawn.

197 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 7 - Ekip Com Profibus modules
ABB | SACE Emax 2
61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
53 63
A4
X
XV
O)
*
S75I/5
193
194
XK7 1 XK7 2
A3
Ekip Com R Profibus

Ekip Com Profibus
K51 K51
COM COM
W5R
W6R
W6
W5
XV W5 W6 W5R W6R
X W5 W6 W5R W6R
A4
(A) (B) (A) (B)

BUS 1 BUS 2
* L), * M) * L), * M)
Diagrams 53 - 63

Termination resistors The modules provide the possibility to insert a 220 Ω termination resistor on the RS-485 bus,
by setting the dip-switches Rterm on the side of the modules, in position on.
In the event of termination of the bus, a 390 Ω pull-up or pull-down resistor must also be
inserted on the lines, by setting the dip-switches Rpoll, in position on.
These options must be selected before installation of the modules.
For the positions on and off of the dip-switches, see the following figure.
ON
1 2 3 4
Figure 89
ABB | SACE Emax 2
…
Network frequency
Local/Remote
Local Bus
…
Settings
Modules Ekip Com Profibus Serial address
Ekip Com Profibus *R Serial address
…
Function
Power Controller
…
on page 221).
The default serial address is 2 for the Ekip Com Profibus, and 3 for the Ekip Com Profibus
Redundant, and can be modified with a value between 1 and 125.
IMPORTANT: devices connected to the same network must have different

addresses.
modules:
Protection unit
Circuit-breaker
…
Information
Ekip Com Profibus
Modules
Ekip Com Profibus *R
…
Power Controller
The information on the modules that can be viewed includes the serial number and the software
version.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Pos. Description
A
RX LED, green. The possible states are:
B • Off: communication between master and release not active.
• On fixed: communication between master and release active.
B C A
TX LED, green. The possible states are:
C • Off: communication between master and release not active.
• On flashing: communication between master and release active.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
8 - Ekip Com DeviceNet modules
Description The Ekip Com DeviceNet is a communication accessory module, that integrates the circuit-
It can be connected to a CAN network with a DeviceNet communication protocol, and allows
you to:
• Connect the releases as slaves to the network, with dialog functionality.
IMPORTANT: on the same circuit-breaker, a single Ekip Com DeviceNet, and

a single Ekip Com DeviceNet Redundant can be installed.
withdrawn.

201 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip Com DeviceNet modules
ABB | SACE Emax 2
61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
55 65
A4
X
XV
O)
*
S75I/5
193
194
XK7 1 XK7 2
A3
Ekip Com R Devicenet

Ekip Com Devicenet
K51 K51
COM COM
W7R
W8R
W7
W8
XV W7 W8 W7R W8R
X W7 W8 W7R W8R
A4
(H) (L) (H) (L)

BUS 1 BUS 2
* L), * M) * L), * M)
Diagrams 55 - 65

Termination resistor The modules provide the possibility to insert a 120 Ω termination resistor on the RS-485 bus,
by setting the dip-switches Rterm on the side of the modules, in position on. This option must
be selected before the installation of the modules.
For the positions on and off of the dip-switches Rterm, see the following figure (on DeviceNet
communication modules, the remaining dip-switches are not used).
ON
A
1 2 3 4
Figure 90
ABB | SACE Emax 2
…
Network frequency
Local/Remote
Local Bus
…
MAC Address
Settings Ekip Com DeviceNet
Modules Baudrate
MAC Address
Ekip Com DeviceNet *R
Baudrate
…
Function
Power Controller
…

• Ekip Com Address to be assigned to the modules.
DeviceNet: 63
MAC Address 1…63 • Ekip Com IMPORTANT: devices connected
DeviceNet to the same network must have
Redundant: 62 different addresses.
125 kbit/s,
Baudrate 250 kbit/s, 125 kbit/s Data transmission speed
500 kbit/s
on page 221).
modules:
Protection unit
Circuit-breaker
…
Information
Ekip DeviceNet
Modules
Ekip DeviceNet *R
…
Power Controller
The information on the modules that can be viewed includes the serial number and the software
version.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Pos. Description
A
RX LED, green. The possible states are:
• Off: device off line (with red TX LED off) (1), or in error conditions (with red TX
LED on).
B C A B
• On fixed: device on line, and allocated on a master (operating condition).
• On flashing: device on line, but not allocated on a master (device ready for
communication).
TX LED, red. The possible states are:
• Off: no error.
C
• On fixed: device in bus off condition.
• On flashing: I/O connection (cyclic data) in timeout.
(1)
The device has not yet sent Duplicate ID sequence on line.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
9 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP modules
Description The Ekip Com Modbus TCP is a communication accessory module, that integrates the circuit-
It can be connected to an Ethernet network with a Modbus TCP communication protocol, and
allows you to:
IMPORTANT: since the modules allow control of the circuit-breaker and access
to the data contained in the release, they can be connected only to networks
that meet all the necessary requirements for safety and prevention of
unauthorised access (for example, the control system network of an
installation). It is responsibility of the installer to make sure that all the
necessary security measures are adopted (for example, a firewall). The modules
cannot be connected directly to the Internet. Connection is recommended
only to dedicated Ethernet networks, with the Modbus TCP communication
protocol.
IMPORTANT: on the same circuit-breaker, a single Ekip Com Modbus TCP,

and a single Ekip Com Modbus TCP Redundant can be installed.
withdrawn.

205 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 9 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP modules
ABB | SACE Emax 2
61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
52 62
A4
X
XV
O)
*
S75I/5
193
194
XK7 1 XK7 2
A3
Ekip Com R Modbus TCP

Ekip Com Modbus TCP
K51 K51
COM COM
RJ45
W9 RJ45 W9R
n n
XV
X
A4
BUS 1 BUS 2
* L), * M) * L), * M)
Diagrams 52 - 62

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Access from the display With the modules energized, and the Local Bus enabled, the presence of the modules on the
terminal box activates additional menus on the display:
• In order to set the addressing of the modules.
• In order to display information on the modules.
The following table illustrates the path from the display to set addressing for the modules:
…
Network
frequency
Local/Remote
Local Bus
…
Force Static IP address
Settings Static IP Address
Modules Ekip Com Modbus TCP
Static Network Mask
Static Gateway Address
Ekip Com Modbus TCP (1)
*R
…
Function
Power
Controller
…
(1)
Like the Ekip Com Modbus TCP menu.
The following table illustrates the parameters for setting the addressing of the modules: For
further information, see the table on page 208.

Force Static IP • Off = Dynamic IP address.
Off, On Off
address • On = Static IP address.
Displayed with static IP Address enabled, it must be selected in
Static IP Address
order to insert the IP Address of the modules.
Static Network Mask
order to insert the subnet mask of the modules.
Static Gateway
the presence of multiple subnets, in order to insert the IP Address
Address
of the node to which the modules are connected.
modules:
Protection unit
Circuit-breaker
…
Information
Ekip Com Modbus TCP
Modules
Ekip Com Modbus TCP *R
…
Power Controller

• The IP address, the Network Mask, and the Gateway Address.
• TCP Clients.
• The MAC Address.
The following table illustrates the information on the modules:
Information Description
This is the address assigned to the modules at the moment of
connection to the network. It consists of four bytes (for a total of 32 bits),
each of which can have value from 0 to 255.
By default, allocation is dynamic. With dynamic allocation, the modules
wait to receive the IP address from a DHCP server.
Without a DHCP server, the modules adopt an Autoconfiguration IP
IP Address
Address in the range 169.254.xxx.xxx, calculated in a pseudo random
manner so as to be the same at every switch-on.
Alternatively, you can enable the static IP address option, which allows
the IP address to be forced. In this case, you must make sure that the
IP Address inserted is different to that of the other devices connected to
the same network.
This is the subnet mask, and identifies the method to recognize the
subnet to which the modules belong, with the possibility of searching for
Network Mask the modules within a defined set of recipients.
If you enabled the option Static IP Address, you must also enter the
correct Network Mask.
The IP address of the node to which the module it is connected, in the
Gateway presence of multiple subnets.
Address If you enabled the Static IP Address option, you must also enter the
correct Gateway Address.
There are three IP Addresses of the client devices connected to the
TCP Client
modules.
MAC Address It is the address assigned by ABB, having a OUI equal to ac:d3:64 (1).
(1)
Organizationally Unique Identifier, formed from the first three bytes of a MAC address, and which uniquely
identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device.
Configuration With the exception of addressing, the modules can be configured only with the Ekip Connect
application (see the chapter "13 - Other accessories", and the paragraph "Ekip Connect
application" on page 221):
• With Ekip T&P module connected to the release, and serial scan (see page 222).
• With Ekip Bluetooth module connected to the release, and Bluetooth scan (see page 221).
• With the modules connected to the Ethernet network, and Ethernet scan.
With serial or Bluetooth scan, configuration is possible only with Local Bus enabled.
On Ekip Connect the following options are also available:
• IEEE 1588, to enable the IEEE 1588 protocol for distribution of the clock signal and
synchronization.
• IEEE 1588 master, to set the modules as the master in the section of the network to which
they belong.
• Gratuitous ARP, to enable/disable the periodic generation of an ARP Gratuitous message,
used by Ekip Connect in order to find the modules with an Ethernet scan without knowing
the IP address.
• HTTP server, to enable/disable the Web Server function, that is, the possibility to find the
modules from a web server.
The Web Server function is disabled by default.
IMPORTANT: with the Web Server function enabled, it is recommended to

select local access mode for the modules.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Pos. Description
C B
A
A Link LED, green. The possible states are:
B • Off: connection error (signal absent).
• On fixed: correct connection.
Activity LED, yellow The possible states are:
C • Off: no activity on the line.
• On flashing: activity present on the line (in reception and/or transmission).
ABB | SACE Emax 2
10 - Ekip Com Profinet modules
Description The Ekip Com Profinet is a communication accessory module, that integrates the circuit-
It can be connected to an Ethernet network with a Profinet communication protocol, and
allows you to:
IMPORTANT: the modules can be connected only to networks that meet all
the necessary requirements for safety and prevention of unauthorised access
(for example, the control system network of an installation). It is responsibility
of the installer to make sure that all the necessary security measures are
adopted (for example, a firewall). Connection is recommended only to dedicated
Ethernet networks, with the Profinet communication protocol. The module
cannot be connected to the Internet.
IMPORTANT: on the same circuit-breaker, a single Ekip Com Profinet, and a

single Ekip Com Profinet Redundant can be installed.
AUP auxiliary contacts The module is always supplied with dedicated AUP auxiliary position contacts, which in the
case of a withdrawable circuit-breaker supply the signal for inserted/extracted moving part
withdrawn.

Ekip RTC contact The module is always supplied with an Ekip RTC auxiliary contact, that supplies the release
210 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 10 - Ekip Com Profinet modules
ABB | SACE Emax 2
61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
54 64
A4
X
XV
O)
*
S75I/5
193
194
XK7 1 XK7 2
A3
Ekip Com R Profinet

Ekip Com Profinet
K51 K51
COM COM
RJ45
RJ45
W10 W10R
n n
XV
X
A4
BUS 1 BUS 2
* L), * M) * L), * M)
Diagrams 54 - 64

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Access from the display With the modules energized and Local Bus enabled, the modules can be viewed on the display.
modules:
Protection unit
Circuit-breaker
…
Information
Ekip Com Profinet
Modules
Ekip Com Profinet *R
…
Power Controller

• The MAC address, assigned by ABB and with an OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier,
formed of the first three bytes of a MAC address, and which uniquely identifies the
manufacturer of an Ethernet device) equal to ac:d3:64.
Pos. Description
C B • Off: power supply absent.
A
Link LED, green. The possible states are:
A
ABB | SACE Emax 2
11 - Ekip Link module
Description Ekip Link is a communication accessory module that integrates the circuit-breaker in an internal
Ethernet network with an ABB proprietary protocol.
IMPORTANT: the module can only be connected to internal Ethernet networks

with a single switchgear or multiple switchgears, to which releases or ABB
Emax 2 accessories are collected. It is responsibility of the installer to make
sure that all the necessary security measures are adopted for all the devices
connected (for example, the necessary access authorizations). The module
cannot be connected to other Ethernet networks (for example, system control
or office networks), or to the Internet.
The module is necessary if you wish to implement these functions:

• Power Controller.
• Zone Selectivity.
• Programmable Logic.
For these functions, the releases of the system tat are involved must be equipped with an Ekip
Link, and for each of these the IP addresses of the Ekip Link modules of the other releases
must be inserted.
With the Power Controller function (see page 151), each release can:
• Acquire the state of the loads remotely and monitor them.
• Play the role of Master, and collect the energy measurements of the releases inserted as
Energy Generators.
• Supply energy measurements to the releases inserted as Master.
The state of the loads can be acquired by checking the state of the inputs of the signalling
modules connected to the releases whose IP address have been inserted, while the loads
can be monitored by programming their outputs. The programming of the outputs cannot
be performed remotely, but only locally on the releases to which the signalling modules are
connected.
Remote acquisition of the state of the loads and monitoring of the loads can also be implemented
with Ekip Signalling 10K modules connected to the network.
With the Zone Selectivity function (see page 93):

• The IP addresses inserted refer to the releases with the role of interlock compared with
respect to the current role.
• For every interlock release inserted, the protections for which selectivity is to be implemented
must be selected.
• These selected protections are added to those wired as L Gext MCR and linst.
• It is possible to insert a mask, that identifies the protections for which the received information
on selectivity is to be retransmitted, regardless of the fact that the release is in alarm.
213 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 11 - Ekip Link module
With the Programmable Logic function, it is possible to program the activation of the Ekip Link
up to 4 bits, each bit according to any combination of the status bits of a release whose IP
Address has been inserted.
These four bits are indicated as states A, B, C and D remotely programmable, and their value
is transmitted to the release to which the Ekip Link module is connected.
Only with Ekip Dip releases, the module can also be used with a function similar to that one
of the Ekip Com Modbus TCP module, but with possibility to communicate only with an ABB
master (for example, Ekip Connect or Ekip Control Panel).
IMPORTANT: only one Ekip Link can be installed on the same circuit-breaker.
Compatibility and power supply The module can be installed in the presence of Ekip Dip, Touch, Hi-Touch, G Touch, and G
Hi-Touch releases, and requires the presence of an Ekip Supply module in the first slot of the
AUP auxiliary contacts The module is always supplied with dedicated AUP auxiliary position contacts, which in the
case of a withdrawable circuit-breaker supply the signal for inserted/extracted moving part
The assembly assures that the communication is also maintained with the withdrawn moving
part.

Ekip RTC contact The module is always supplied with an Ekip RTC auxiliary contact, that supplies the release
ABB | SACE Emax 2
61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
58
A4
X
XV
O)
*
S75I/5
193
194
XK7 1 XK7 2
A3
Ekip Link
K51
COM
RJ45
W13
XV
X
A4
BUS 1
* L), * M)
Diagram 58

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Access from the display With the module energized, and the Local Bus enabled, the presence of the module on the
terminal box activates additional menus on the display :
• To set the addressing of the module.
• To display information on the module.
The following table illustrates the path from the display to set addressing of the module:
…
Network frequency
Local/Remote
Local Bus
…
Force Static IP
address
Settings
Modules Static IP Address
Ekip Link
Static Network Mask
Static Gateway
Address
…
Function
Power Controller
…
The following table illustrates the parameters for setting the addressing of the modules: For
further information, see the table on page 217.

• Off = Dynamic IP address.
Force Static IP address Off, On Off
• On = Static IP address.
Static IP Address
order to insert the IP Address of the module.
Static Network Mask
order to insert the subnet mask of the module.
Displayed with static IP Address enabled, it must be selected
Static Gateway Address in the presence of multiple subnets, in order to insert the IP
Address of the node to which the module is connected.
modules:
Protection unit
Circuit-breaker
Information …
Modules Ekip Link
…
Power Controller

• The IP address, the Network Mask, and the Gateway Address.
• The MAC Address.
The following table illustrates the information on the module:
Information Description
This is the address assigned to the modules at the moment of
connection to the network. It consists of four bytes (for a total of 32
bits), each of which can have value from 0 to 255.
By default, allocation is dynamic. With dynamic allocation, the modules
wait to receive the IP address from a DHCP server.
Without a DHCP server, the modules adopt an Autoconfiguration IP
IP Address
Address in the range 169.254.xxx.xxx, calculated in a pseudo random
manner so as to be the same at every switch-on.
Alternatively, you can enable the static IP address option, which allows
the IP address to be forced. In this case, you must make sure that the
IP Address inserted is different to that of the other devices connected
to the same network.
This is the subnet mask, and identifies the method to recognize the
subnet to which the modules belong, with the possibility of searching
Network Mask for the modules within a defined set of recipients.
If you enabled the option Static IP Address, you must also enter the
correct Network Mask.
The IP address of the node to which the module it is connected, in the
Gateway presence of multiple subnets.
Address If you enabled the Static IP Address option, you must also enter the
correct Gateway Address.
MAC Address It is the address assigned by ABB, having a OUI equal to ac:d3:64 (1).
(1)
Organizationally Unique Identifier, formed from the first three bytes of a MAC address, and which uniquely
identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device.
Configuration With the exception of addressing, the module can be configured only with the Ekip Connect
application (see the chapter "13 - Other accessories", and the paragraph "Ekip Connect
application" on page 221):
• With Ekip T&P module connected to the release, and serial scan (see page 222).
• With Ekip Bluetooth module connected to the release, and Bluetooth scan (see page 221).
• With the modules connected to the Ethernet network, and Ethernet scan.
With serial or Bluetooth scan, configuration is possible only with Local Bus enabled.
On Ekip Connect the following options are also available:

• IEEE 1588, to enable the IEEE 1588 protocol for distribution of the clock signal and
synchronization.
• IEEE 1588 master, to set the module as the master in the section of the network to which
it belongs.
• Gratuitous ARP, to enable/disable the periodic generation of an ARP Gratuitous message,
used by Ekip Connect in order to find the module with an Ethernet scan without knowing
the IP address.
Furthermore, it is possible to display additional information to that shown on display, and
regarding the state of the actors for the Zone Selectivity function, and the state (active/not
active) of the remotely programmable bits.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Pos. Description
C B • Off: power supply absent.
A
Link LED, green. The possible states are:
A
ABB | SACE Emax 2
12 - Ekip Com Actuator module
Description Ekip Com Actuator is an accessory module that allows the Emax 2 circuit-breakers to be
opened and closed remotely.
Connections Ekip Com Actuator is installed on the front of the circuit-breaker in the accessories area.

Wiring diagrama are provided below for the module:
78 76
+ +
~ ~
A4
SC S43 SO S43
C1 C11
X C1 C3 C11 C13
C3 C13 XV C1 C3 C11 C13
C11
C13
C1
C3
C2 C12
XK7 9 K51 XK7 7 K51
YC YO
Ekip Com Actuator
Ekip Com Actuator

K51 K51
YC YO
A1 XK7 10 XK7 8
XB3 1 XB4 1
YC YO
XB3 2 XB4 2
C12
C2
XV C2 C12
X C2 C12
A4
- -
~ ~
Diagrams 78 - 76

Compatibility Ekip Com Actuator module is supplied on request and is compatible with all Ekip releases if
there is an Ekip Com or Ekip Link module present.
219 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Com Actuator module
ABB | SACE Emax 2
13 - Other accessories
Rating Plug modules The Rating Plug defines the rated current In, necessary in order to set the current protections
on the release, where these refer to In.
It is supplied with all Ekip releases, mounted on a front connector dedicated and accessible to
the user, and can be replaced with release off and circuit breaker open.
IMPORTANT: the replacement of the Rating Plug with release on or circuit

breaker closed may cause malfunction of the release, or unwanted opening
of the switch.
NOTE: a trip unit can be equipped with any Rating Plug with a rated current of up to
Iu, i.e. the rated uninterrupted current of the circuit-breaker (indicate on the rating
plate of the circuit-breaker).
The release continuously checks for the presence of the Rating Plug, signalling its absence or
any errors in assembly or installation.
Once mounted, when the release is energized, its installation is requested.
On the Touch, Hi-Touch, G Touch and G Hi-Touch releases to activate the residual current
protection, it is necessary to mount a Rating Plug RC. They are also available Rating Plug L =
OFF, which allow you to cancel the protection L.
Further information on the assembly of the Rating Plug is available from the web site http://
www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular on the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0510.
Gext Toroid Gext is the external homopolar current sensor (indicated also as S.G.R or Source Ground
Return), that can be installed with Ekip Touch, Hi-Touch, G Touch, and G Hi-Touch, LSI and
LSIG.
During programming of the release, its presence must be selected (see the menu Settings,
Circuit-breaker, Earth protection) that activates the protection against the Gext earth fault
(see the menu Advanced).
IMPORTANT: the Gext sensor can be selected as an alternative to the RC.

Therefore the Gext and RC protections are alternatives.
Further information on the connection of the Gext sensor is available at the site http://www.
abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular in kit sheet 1SDH001000R0507.
RC sensor RC is the external residual current sensor, which can be installed with Ekip Touch, Hi-Touch, G
Touch, and G Hi-Touch releases equipped with Rating Plug RC and Ekip Measuring Pro.
During programming of the release, its presence must be selected (see the menu Settings,
Circuit-breaker, Earth protection), that activates the RC residual current protection (see the
menu Advanced).
IMPORTANT: the RC toroid can be selected as an alternative to the Gext

toroid. Therefore the RC and Gext protections are alternatives.
Further information on the connection of the RC sensor is available at the site http://www.abb.
com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular in kit sheet 1SDH001000R0521.
220 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electronic accessories | 13 - Other accessories

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Connect application Ekip Connect is the free application for communication and testing of ABB low voltage circuit-
breakers equipped with compatible releases, in particular Ekip releases.
It must be installed on PCs equipped with the Microsoft Windows® operating system by
downloading it from the site http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter.
With its communication function, it allows you to:
• Monitor the status of the circuit-breakers connected and record information.
• To perform operation, reset, signalling, commands etc
• Configure the protection releases with customized parameters.
• Configure the electronic accessories, connected to the release via Local Bus.
• Download information from releases equipped with Datalogger.
• Generate communication reports
• Restore configurations.
With test function, and Ekip T&P module (see page Ekip T&P module), it allows you to:
• Simulate fault conditions, by performing manual or automatic tests.
• Perform opening tests
• Generate test reports.
Further information on the Ekip Connect application is available from the web site http://www.
abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, where the manual is available 1SDH000891R0002.
Ekip Bluetooth module The Ekip Bluetooth allows connection via Bluetooth between the Ekip releases, and a support
(PC, tablet, or smart phone) with the Ekip Connect application installed the (see the previous
paragraph).
IMPORTANT: the Ekip Bluetooth module can also be connected to the releases
when in service.
NOTE: Ekip Bluetooth only powers the release. Therefore, in order to set and to
display information on any electronic accessories connected to the terminal box,
these must be powered with an Ekip Supply module (see page 162).
It draws its power from a rechargeable lithium-polymer battery supplied with the unit. It is
connected directly to the front test connector of the release, and allows a release without
auxiliary voltage to be powered.
It is switched on by pressing the power button on the side, and is equipped with two LEDs:
• The first lit in green with the device on and the battery charge, red with the device turned
on and low battery.
• The second flashing blue with active Bluetooth communication.
NOTE: the red flashing LED indicates that battery is completely drained, an error
condition, or malfunction of the module.
The battery charging is performed by connecting the module to the USB ports of a PC with
the supplied cable. Connection to a PC automatically switches the module on, and charging
in progress is indicated by the flashing green LED, with increasing frequency as the level of
charging rises. Completion of charging is indicated by the green LED on (fixed).
NOTE: during recharging, the module must be kept energized.
Further information on Ekip Bluetooth is available from the web site http://www.abb.com/
abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular on kit sheet 1SDH001000R0518, and in the Ekip
Connect application manual 1SDH000891R0002.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip T&P module The Ekip T&P module is part of the Ekip T&P programming and test kit for Ekip releases, and
allows you to:
• In the absence of auxiliary voltage, to supply the release.
• With the Ekip Connect application (see page 221), access the information and the pages
for programming the release, and to activate the test pages.
IMPORTANT: Ekip T&P can also be connected to the releases when in service.
In the case of connection to releases in service, it is not possible to perform
an opening test.
NOTE: Ekip T&P only powers the release. Therefore, in order to set and to display
information on any electronic accessories connected to the terminal box, these must
be powered with an Ekip Supply module (see page 162).
It draws its power from the PC, and connects one side directly to the test connector at the front
of the release, and on the other to the USB ports of the PC with the cable supplied.
It turns on after connecting to the PC, and is equipped with two LEDs, a green one indicating
that the module is on, and a yellow one indicating active communication.
Ekip TT module
Ekip TT is supplied as standard with Ekip Dip releases not mounted on a circuit-breaker, and
with Touch, Hi-Touch, G Touch, and G Hi-Touch releases, and allows the following:
• Make sure that the opening mechanism of the circuit-breaker functions properly, commanding
an opening by pressing the TEST button of the Ekip TT (opening test).
• In the absence of auxiliary voltage and where the circuit breaker is open due to a protection
tripping, power the release so that you can see which protection tripped either on the
display or through the lighting of the corresponding LEDs.
• In the absence of auxiliary voltage, power the Ekip Touch, Hi-Touch, G Touch, and G Hi-
Touch releases in order to set the protections.
IMPORTANT: Ekip TT can also be connected to the releases when in service.

In the case of connection to releases in service, it is not possible to perform
an opening test.
NOTE: the Ekip TT only powers the release. Therefore, in order to set and to display
information on any electronic accessories connected to the terminal box, these must
be powered with an Ekip Supply module (see page 162).
Draws its power from three AA alkaline batteries 1.5V, connects to the test connector at the
front of the trip unit with the supplied cable, and is turned on by setting the side switch to ON.
It includes a led that is green when the device is energized and the batteries are charged, and
red when the batteries are drained and need to be replaced.
Further information on Ekip TT is available from the web site http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/
DownloadCenter/, in particular on kit sheet 1SDH001000R0519, and in the Ekip Connect
application manual 1SDH000891R0002.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Signalling 10K modules The Ekip Signalling 10K is an external signalling accessory module that can be installed on a
DIN rail.
It can be installed in the presence of Ekip Dip, Touch, Hi-Touch, G Touch, and G Hi-Touch
releases. It must be powered independently from the releases to which it is connected, and can
be powered in AC at nominal 110...240 V AC, or in DC at nominal 24...48 V DC.
On the front it has:
• Ten contacts for output signals.
• Ten or eleven digital inputs.
• A power status LED, and twenty or twenty-one signalling LEDs (one for each output/input).
It can communicate with the outside in two alternative modes:
• Via Local Bus, with a single release equipped with an Ekip Supply module (see page 162).
• Via Ethernet, with a maximum of four releases, each equipped with an Ekip Link module
(see page 213).
With communication via Local Bus, unless the release is disconnected, the closing/opening
of the contacts of the module is commanded by the release, and the information on the state
of the inputs is transmitted by the module to the release. In particular, the release can be
programmed so that:
• The closing/opening of a contact corresponds to a desired event or combination of events
detected by the release.
• The activation of an input corresponds to an action on the part of the release.
With multiple 10-K modules connected via Local Bus to the same release, there can be at
most three of these, and they must be configured differently as one 10K-1, one 10K-2 and
one 10K-3.
With Ethernet communication:

• The module is connected to a network on which the releases equipped with an Ekip Link
module share data packets containing information on their state.
• The IP Addresses of the releases to which you wish to connect it must be inserted on the
module, and each contact can be programmed so as to be closed/open in correspondence
to an event or combination of events regarding a connected release.
• If the module receives a packet sent by a connected release, the module reads the contents
of the packet, and initiates any programmed action.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Ekip Multimeter module The Ekip Multimeter is a remote viewing unit on the front of the switchgear and is equipped
with a touchscreen display.
It can be installed in the presence of Ekip Dip, Touch, Hi-Touch, G Touch and G Hi-Touch
releases, with which it communicates via Local Bus. It must be powered independently from
the release to which it is connected, and can be powered in AC at nominal 110… 240 V AC,
or DC at nominal 24...48 V DC.
One release can communicate with a maximum of four Ekip Multimeters. On the other hand,
the module can be connected to only one release.
In addition, the module makes an auxiliary voltage of 24 V DC available, which can be used to
power the release. If the release is powered through Ekip Multimeter, the power supply must be
applied directly on the terminal box of the circuit-breaker: in fact the Ekip Multimeter is sized in
order to supply only the release, and therefore it is not able to supply sufficient power to supply
an Ekip Supply module and any other electronic accessories connected to the terminal box.
In the case of connection to an Ekip Touch, Hi-Touch, G-Touch, and G Hi-Touch release, as
well as displaying the measurements, the module also allows you to set parameters and the
protection thresholds.
Further information on the connection of the RC sensor is available at the site http://www.abb.
com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular in kit sheet 1SDH001000R0520.
External neutral This is a current sensor for the neutral conductor outside the circuit-breaker.
It is supported for three-pole circuit-breakers only; it allows the neutral to be protected by

connection to the Ekip release.It’s supplied on request.
Further information on the connection of the external neutral is available at the site http://www.
abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular with the sheets:
• 1SDH001000R0506 for E2.2 circuit-breakers
• 1SDH001000R0515 for E4.2 and E6.2 circuit-breakers

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Electrical accessories
1 - Electrical Control accessories
YO-YC-YO2-YC2: Opening and The opening coils, YO and YO2, and the closing coils, YC and YC2, allow the circuit-breaker
closing coil to be controlled remotely.
The opening of the circuit-breaker is always possible with the circuit-breaker closed, while
closing is possible with the circuit-breaker open and the closing springs loaded.
The opening and closing coils can operate in two different modes:
• instantaneous service (the minimum duration of the command impulse must be 100ms).
• service with permanent power supply.
NOTE: The second opening coil YO2 is alternative to the under-voltage coil YU.
IMPORTANT:
• In the case of permanent power supply, if the closing coil trips it is

necessary, after opening, to momentarily de-energize the coil in order to
D1 C1 C11 C21
be able to re-use it for the subsequent closing.
C3 C13
• If instead the opening coil trips, it is necessary, after having de-energized
D2 C2 C12 C22 it, to wait at least 30ms before operating the closing coil.
YU
YO2 YC YO YC2 Available voltages and characteristics
The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided below:
Available voltages General characteristics YO-YO2 YC-YC2

(Un) Operating limits (Standards 70%...110% 85%...110%
24V AC/DC IEC60947-2) Un Un
30V AC/DC Inrush power (Ps) AC= 300VA DC= 300W
48V AC/DC Continuous power (Pc) AC= 3.5VA DC= 3.5W
60V AC/DC Opening time 35ms -
110V…120V AC/DC Closing time - 50ms
220V…240V AC/DC
240V...250V AC/DC
380V…400V AC
415V…440V AC
480V…500V AC
500V…550V AC
225 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electrical accessories | 1 - Electrical Control accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
YO-YC-YO2-YC2: Connections

Diagrams 75 - 72 - 77 - 79
Information on assembly is available at the web site http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/

DownloadCenter/, in particular with the sheets kit:
• 1SDH001000R0502 for YO and YO2 coils
• 1SDH001000R0503 for YC and YC2 coils
ABB | SACE Emax 2
YU: under-voltage coil The under-voltage coil YU controls the value of the voltage in the circuit to which it is connected.
The coil opens the circuit-breaker when:

• the power supply voltage of the coil drops to a value in the range 35%… 70% Un
The under-voltage coil YU can in addition be used for the following purposes:
• Release the circuit-breaker remotely using push-buttons of the normally closed type.
• Activate the lock when the circuit-breaker is closed (the closing of the circuit-breaker is
allowed only with the under-voltage coil energized).
NOTE: The power supply of the coil must drawn on the supply side of the circuit-
breaker or from an independent source.
The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided below:
Available voltages (Un) General characteristics YU
24V AC/DC Operating limits (Standards
85%...110% Un
D1 30V AC/DC IEC60947-2)
48V AC/DC Inrush power (Ps) AC= 300VA DC= 300W
60V AC/DC Continuous power (Pc) AC= 3.5VA DC= 3.5W
D2
110V…120V AC/DC Opening time 50ms
YU 220V…240V AC/DC
YO2
240V...250V AC/DC
380V…400V AC
415V…440V AC
480V…500V AC
YU: Connections

73
+
~
A4
SO
X D1
XV D1
D1
A1
XB5 1
YU
XB5 2
D2
XV D2
X D2
A4 -
~
Diagram 73

ABB | SACE Emax 2
YR: remote resetting coil

The remote resetting coil deactivates the lock at the closing of the circuit-breaker, generated by
the opening of the circuit-breaker caused by tripping of the Ekip protection release.
The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided
below:
Available voltages (Un) General characteristics
24V AC/DC Operating limits (Standards
90%...110% Un
110V AC/DC IEC60947-2)
220V AC/DC
YR: Connections

R1
14
R2 +
~
A4
SR
YR
X R1
XV R1
R1
A1 YR
R2
XV R2
X R2
A4 -
~
Diagram 14

ABB | SACE Emax 2
M: motor The motor automatically recharges the closing springs of the circuit-breaker when these are
discharged.
The motor is equipped with a limit contact S33 M/1 that interrupts the power supply of the
motor after loading of the springs is completed.
The motor is equipped with a limit contact S33 M/2 that signals the state of the loaded
springs.For information on the S33 M/2 limit contact refer to the dedicated paragraph "S33
M/2: springs loaded signalling contact" in this chapter.
NOTE: In the absence of power supply, the closing springs can in any case be loaded
manually through the appropriate front control lever.
The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided
below:
Available voltages (Un) General characteristics
24V…30V AC/DC Operating limits (Standards
85%...110% Un
U1 48V…60V AC/DC IEC60947-2)
100V…130V AC/DC Inrush power (Ps) AC= 500VA DC= 500W
U2
220V…250V AC/DC Continuous power (Pc) AC= 100VA DC= 100W
M 380V…400V AC Charging time 7 sec
440V…480V AC
M: Connections

13
+
A4 ~
X U1
XV U1
U1
XB1 1
S33M/1
A1
F1
XB1 2
U2
XV U2
X U2
A4 -
~
Diagram 13

ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 - Electrical signalling accessories
Aux 4Q: auxiliary open-closed The Aux 4Q contacts signal the open/closed state of the circuit-breaker.
contacts
These are "switched" contacts and are available in three types:
• four standard contacts
• four digital signals (low power)
• two standard contacts + two digital signals
NOTE: The standard Aux 4Q contacts are always included in the circuit-breakers
The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:
Characteristics Standard Digital signals

24V - 0.1 A
DC 125V 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms -
250V 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms -
11 21 31 41 3A cos φ 0,3 -
Breaking
250V 5A cos φ 0,7 -
12 22 32 42 capacity
5A cos φ 1 -
AC
13 23 33 43 3A cos φ 1 -
400V 2A cos φ 0,7 -
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
1A cos φ 0,3 -
Minimum load 50mA @ 24V 1mA @ 5V
Aux 4Q: Connections

81
A4
X 12 14 22 24 32 34 42 44
XV 12 14 22 24 32 34 42 44
12
14
22
32
42
24
34
44
A1 Q/1 Q/2 Q/3 Q/4

21
31
41
11
XV 11 21 31 41
X 11 21 31 41
A4
Diagram 81

230 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Aux 6Q: Additional open/closed

auxiliary contacts The additional Aux 6Q contacts signal the open/closed state of the circuit-breaker.
These are "switched" contacts and are available in two types:
• six standard contacts
• six digital signals (low power)
NOTE: it is possible to order the Aux 6Q contacts only if the circuit-breaker is not
equipped with a protection release with the Ekip Signalling 4K module.

24V - 0.1 A
DC 125V 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms -
250V 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms -
3A cos φ 0,3 -
Breaking
250V 5A cos φ 0,7 -
capacity
61 71 81 91 01 5A cos φ 1 -
AC
51
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
52 62
HC
72
K3
82
K4
92
K5
02
K6
3A cos φ 1 -
54 64
HC
74
K7
84
K8
94
K9
04
K10 400V 2A cos φ 0,7 -
Q5..Q10 EKIP Signalling 4K
1A cos φ 0,3 -
Aux 6Q: Connections

A4
X 52 54 62 64 72 74 82 84 92 94 02 04
XV 52 54 62 64 72 74 82 84 92 94 02 04
52
62
72
82
92
02
54
64
74
84
94
04
A1 Q/5 Q/6 Q/7 Q/8 Q/9 Q/10

51
61
71
81
91
01
XV 51 61 71 81 91 01
X 51 61 71 81 91 01
A4
Diagram 1

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Aux 15Q: External additional

open/closed auxiliary contacts The external additional Aux 15Q contacts signal the open/closed state of the circuit-breaker.
These are "switched" contacts and are available in two types:
• 15 standard contacts
• 15 digital signals (low power)

24V - 0.1 A
125V 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms -
DC
0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @
250V -
10ms
Breaking 3A cos φ 0,3 -
capacity 250V 5A cos φ 0,7 -
5A cos φ 1 -
AC
3A cos φ 1 -
400V 2A cos φ 0,7 -
1A cos φ 0,3 -
Aux 15Q external: Connections

91
202 204 212 214 222 224 232 234 242 244 252 254 262 264 272 274
Q/11 Q/12 Q/13 Q/14 Q/15 Q/16 Q/17 Q/18

201 211 221 231 241 251 261 271
A4
282 284 292 294 302 304 312 314 322 324 332 334 342 344
Q/19 Q/20 Q/21 Q/22 Q/23 Q/24 Q/25

281 291 301 311 321 331 341
Diagram 91

ABB | SACE Emax 2
AUP: auxiliary position contacts The AUP contacts are intended for circuit-breakers in withdrawable version.
They electrically signal the position of a moving part (inserted/test/withdrawn) in relation to the
fixed part in which they are inserted.
These are "switching" contacts and are available, up to a maximum of 10 contacts per circuit-
breaker, in the following configurations:
• five standard contacts
• five digital signals
• five additional standard contacts
• five additional digital signals

24V - 0.1 A
DC 125V 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms -
250V 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms -
3A cos φ 0,3 -
Breaking
250V 5A cos φ 0,7 -
capacity
5A cos φ 1 -
AC
3A cos φ 1 -
400V 2A cos φ 0,7 -
1A cos φ 0,3 -
AUP: Connections

96 97
A4
XF 102 104 112 114 122 124 132 134 142 144 152 154 162 164 172 174 182 184 192 194
152
162
172
182
192
154
164
174
184
194
102
122
132
142
104
112
124
134
144
114
4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
S75I/1 S75I/2 S75I/3 S75I/4

1 1 1 1
2 4 2 4
A3 S75T/1 S75T/2
1 1
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
S75E/1 S75E/2 S75E/3 S75E/4

1 1 1 1
101
121
131
141
151
161
171
181
191
111
XF 101 111 121 131 141 151 161 171 181 191
A4
Diagrams 96 - 97

ABB | SACE Emax 2
RTC: ready to close signalling

contact The RTC contact indicates that the circuit-breaker is ready to receive a close command.
The conditions necessary to allow the closing of the circuit-breaker are:
• circuit-breaker open
• springs loaded
• absence of an opening command or a lock in opening
NOTE: If the circuit-breaker is open as a result of the Ekip protection release tripping,
in order to allow it to be closed the Reset signal of the circuit-breaker must have been
restored (press the TU Reset button on the front).
The RTC contact is of the “switched” type and is available in a standard version or in the
versions for digital signals.
45 Characteristics Standard Digital signals

24V - 0.1 A
46
0.3A @ 0ms -
125V
48 DC 0.15A @ 10ms -
RTC Breaking 0.3A @ 0ms -
250V
capacity 0.15A @ 10ms -
1A cos φ 0,3 -
125V
AC 2A cos φ 0,7 -
- 250V
3A cos φ 1 -
RTC: Connections

71
A4
X 46 48
XV 46 48
46
48
XB6 2 3
A1
RTC
XB6 1
45
XV 45
X 45
A4
Diagram 71

ABB | SACE Emax 2
S51: release tripping signalling

contact The S51 contact signals the opening of the circuit-breaker due to tripping of the Ekip protection
release.
It is available in two different types:
• standard contact
• contact for digital signals
NOTE: The standard S51 contact is always included in automatic circuit-breakers,

and is associated with the TU Reset mechanical signalling.

24V - 0.1 A
0.3A @ 0ms -
95 125V
DC 0.15A @ 10ms -
96 Breaking 0.3A @ 0ms -
250V
capacity 0.15A @ 10ms -
98
1,5A cos φ 0,3 -
S51 125V
AC 3A cos φ 0,7 -
- 250V
5A cos φ 1 -
S51: Connections

11
A4
X 96 98
XV 96 98
96
98
XB7 2 3
A1
S51
XB7 1
95
XV 95
X 95
A4
Diagram 11

ABB | SACE Emax 2
S33 M/2: springs loaded

signalling contact The S33 M/2 contact signals the current state of the closing springs of the circuit-breaker
control (loaded or discharged).
It is available in two types:
• standard contact
• contact for digital signals
NOTE: the S33_M/2 contact is always included in the gearmotor for automatic loading
of the springs

24V - 0.1 A
DC 125V 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms -
250V 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms -
3A cos φ 0,3 -
Breaking
250V 5A cos φ 0,7 -
capacity
5A cos φ 1 -
AC
3A cos φ 1 -
400V 2A cos φ 0,7 -
1A cos φ 0,3 -
S33/M2: Connections

35 12
A4
36
X 36 38
38 XV 36 38
36
38
S33
XB2 2 3
A1 4 2
S33M/2
1
XB2 1
35
XV 35
X 35
A4
Diagram 12

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Mechanical accessories
1 - Mechanical Protection accessories

PBC: opening and closing The push-button protection inhibits the use of the opening and closing push-buttons.
push-button protection
• protection that simultaneously inhibits the use of both push-buttons. The use of the push-
buttons is only allowed with the aid of an appropriate key.
• padlockable protection that inhibits the use of one or both push-buttons with the aid of
a padlock.

IP54 protection The IP54 protection completely protects the front of the circuit-breaker, to achieve Protection
class IP54.
It is always equipped with two locks for closing, available in two types:
• lock with different key code numbers (for an individual circuit-breaker).
• lock with the same key code number (for more than one circuit-breaker).

237 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Mechanical accessories | 1 - Mechanical Protection accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 - Mechanical safety accessories
KLC: open position key lock The KLC lock locks the circuit-breaker in the open position.
It can also be used during maintenance activities on the circuit-breaker after removal of the
guard accessory.
The KLC lock is available with two types of locking:
• lock with the same key code number (for more than one circuit-breaker). The maximum
number of key code numbers available is five.
If set up appropriately, the KLC-A lock can work with four other types of locks:
• Ronis
• Profalux
• Kirk
• Castell
NOTE: The supply of Ronis - Profalux - Kirk - Castell locks is at customer's expense.

• 1SDH001000R0702 1SDH001000R0703 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB;
• 1SDH001000R0703 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks;
• 1SDH001000R0718 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Castell locks;
PLC: padlock The PLC padlock locks the circuit-breaker in the open position.

• lock usable with a maximum number of three padlocks with a diameter of 4 mm.
• lock usable with a maximum number of two padlocks with a diameter of 8 mm.
• lock for a padlock with a diameter of 7 mm. or for a latch chain
NOTE: The padlocks are at the expense of the customer.

Anti-racking-in lock The anti-racking-in lock allows the moving part of the circuit-breaker to be inserted only into
the corresponding fixed part.
02
08
E2.2
10 N-B-S
It is intended for all withdrawable circuit breakers.
LEFT
12
16
20
25
08 E2.2
10
12 H
16
20
MATCH 25
ALSO
THE
RIGHT
SIDE

MOC: Operation counter The mechanical operation counter displays the number of mechanical operations performed
by the circuit-breaker.
00001 Information on the assembly is available from the web site http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/
238 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
ABB | SACE Emax 2
PLP: padlock in connected/ The PLP lock locks the moving part of a withdrawable circuit-breaker in the fixed part, in one
test/disconnected positions of the following positions:
• connected
• test
• withdrawn
Only one type is available that allows you to mount up to three padlocks with a diameter of 8
mm.
NOTE: The PLP lock can also be supplied in the presence of a "KLP lock in disconnected
position".

KLP: key lock for connected/ The KLP lock for connected/test/disconnected position locks the moving part of a withdrawable
test/disconnected positions circuit-breaker in the fixed part, in one of the following positions:
• connected
• test
• withdrawn
NOTE: it is possible to lock the moving part in the disconnected position only by
using the additional accessory "KLP lock for disconnected position".
The KLP lock for connected/test/disconnected positions is available with two types of lock:
• lock with the same key code number (for more than one circuit-breaker). The maximum
number of key code numbers available is five.
Through an appropriate setup, the KLP lock for connected/test/disconnected positions can
work with three other types of lock:
• Ronis
• Profalux
• Kirk
• Castell
The maximum number of locks that can be installed per circuit-breaker is the two, for all types
of lock.
NOTE: the supply of Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks is at customer's expense.
NOTE: The KLP lock can also be supplied in the presence of a PLP lock

• 1SDH001000R0704 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB;
• 1SDH001000R0726 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB;
• 1SDH001000R0705 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks;
• 1SDH001000R0719 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Castell locks;
KLP lock additional accessory This additional accessory limits the locking function to the disconnected position only.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
SL: shutter lock The SL shutter lock locks the shutters of the fixed part.
It is possible to lock the upper and lower shutters independently.

This is an accessory available on all the fixed parts and can work with the aid of padlocks with
diameters of 4mm, 6mm or 8mm, with a maximum of four padlocks per fixed part (two for the
upper shutters and two for the lower shutters).
SLE: external shutter lock The SLE lock locks the shutters from the outside of the fixed part with the aid of a 4mm, 6mm
or 8mm padlock.

DLC: Door opening lock with The DLC prevents the following operations from being carried out:
the circuit-breaker in closed
• opening the switchgear door with the circuit-breaker closed if the circuit-breaker is in
position
fixed version.
• opening the switchgear door with the circuit-breaker closed and in connected position if
the circuit-breaker is in fixed version.
• closing of the circuit-breaker when the switchgear door is open.
DLP: door opening lock with the The DLP lock prevents the switchgear door from being opened when the moving part of the
circuit-breaker in connected/ circuit-breaker is in the connected or test position.
test position
It can be installed alternatively on the right side or the left side of the fixed part.
NOTE: The DLP lock is used as an alternative to the mechanical interlock.

DLR: lock on racking-in/ The DLR lock prevents the moving part from being racked in/out of the fixed part when the
racking-out of the moving part switchgear door is open.
with the door open
It is available on request on all fixed parts

ABB | SACE Emax 2
3 - Mechanical Interlocks
Mechanical interlocks determine the opening/closing logic between two or three circuit-
breakers.
Four types of interlocks are available, usable in both fixed and withdrawable versions.
Mechanical interlock of type A - The Type A interlock is applicable to two circuit-breakers (normal power supply + emergency
Two Circuit-breakers power supply).
It allows you never to have two circuit-breakers in the closed position at the same time.
Mechanical interlock of type B - The Type B interlock is applicable to three circuit-breakers (two normal power supplies +
Three Circuit-breakers emergency power supply).
It only allows the closing of the two circuit-breakers of the normal power supply if the circuit-
breaker of the emergency power supply is open. The circuit-breaker of the emergency power
supply can be closed only if the others two are open.
Mechanical interlock of type C - The Type C interlock is applicable to three circuit-breakers (two normal power supplies + a
Three Circuit-breakers bus tie).
It allows the simultaneous closing of one or two circuit-breakers, resulting in two possible types
of power supply of the half busbars:
• power supply from a single transformer (bus tie closed)
• power supply from both transformers (bus tie open)

Mechanical interlock of type D - The Type C interlock is applicable to three circuit-breakers (three power supplies on the same
Three Circuit-breakers bar that must not operate in parallel)
It allows only one of the three circuit-breakers to be closed

241 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Mechanical accessories | 3 - Mechanical Interlocks

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Putting into service and maintenance
1 - Putting into service
Introduction The general check is necessary:

• when put into service for the first time
• after prolonged inactivity of the circuit-breaker
HAZARD! RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! Test the circuit-breaker with all

switchgear apparatus de-energized.
IMPORTANT: The checks involve carrying out procedures that can be performed
only by Expert Persons in the electrical area (IEV 195-04-01: Person with
sufficient training and experience to allow him/her to perceive the risks and
to avoid the hazards potentially created by electricity).
General checks Before putting it into service for the first time or after a prolonged period of inactivity, some
checks must be carried out on the circuit-beaker and the environment in which it is installed:
Points to be
Checks
checked
1. Sufficient change of air to avoid overtemperatures
2. Clean location, free of all installation refuse (e.g.: cables, tools,
metal splinters)
Switchgear 3. Circuit-breaker mounted correctly (tightening torques, air distances
respected)
4. The installation environmental conditions must be consistent with
the “Environmental conditions” specifications on page 22
1. Power connections tightened to the terminals of the circuit-breaker
2. Cables with adequate cross-section
Connections
3. Correct earth connections
4. Maximum distances of separators respected
Perform some opening and closing operations (See chapter
"Description of the product - circuit-breaker opening/closing
operations on page 15). The spring loading lever must move with
Operations regularly
WARNING! in the presence of an under-voltage coil the
circuit-breaker can be closed only after the release is
energized
Connect the protection device Ekip TT to the release and verify that
Alarms release
there are no alarms present
State of the With the Ekip Dip release, the status of the circuit-breaker must not
circuit-breaker be in error (see the table on page 50). Perform a closing operation/
with Ekip DIP opening on the circuit-breaker and verify the absence of alarms (see
release the table on page 50).
State of the With the Ekip Touch release, the state circuit-breaker must be read
circuit-breaker correctly (see the table on page 50). Perform a closing operation/
with Ekip Touch opening on the circuit-breaker and verify correct reading of the
release change of state.
With circuit-breaker closed and in conditions of rest (without
Trip Test circulating currents), carry out a Trip test, and verify the opening of
the circuit-breaker
242 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Putting into service and maintenance | 1 - Putting into service
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Procedures for checking the The following procedures for checking the accessories are to be performed before they are
accessories put into service:
Accessories (*)
to
Procedure
be checked
1. Power the gearmotor for loading the springs at the relevant rated
voltage.
Result: The springs are loaded correctly. The signals are normal.
When the springs are loaded the gearmotor stops.
Gearmotor 2. Perform some closing and opening operations.
Result: The gearmotor reloads the springs after every closing
operation.
NOTE! If present, power the under-voltage coil in advance.

1. Power the under-voltage coil at the relevant rated voltage and
perform the closing operation on the circuit-breaker.
Result: The circuit-breaker closes correctly; the signallings are
normal.
2. Turn off the voltage supply to the release. The circuit-breaker
opens.
3. Power the under-voltage coil at the relevant rated voltage and
Under-voltage coil perform the closing operation on the circuit-breaker.
Result: The circuit-breaker closes; the signal changes over.
WARNING! If the under-voltage coil has been tripped by a

power failure, the circuit-breaker can be closed only after
the coil has been energized electrically. Make sure that the
coil has effectively been tripped by a power failure. Otherwise,
examine the circuit-breaker and associated device to make
sure that they are in a good condition.
1. Close the circuit-breaker.
Opening coil 2. Power the opening coil at the relevant rated voltage.
Result: The circuit-breaker opens correctly; the signals are normal.
1. Open the circuit-breaker.
2. Load the springs manually or electrically.
Closing coil
3. Power the closing coil at its rated voltage.
Result: The circuit-breaker closes correctly; the signals are normal.
1. Power the protection release with the Vaux auxiliary power supply.
2. Power the Ekip Com Actuator contacts.
3. Close the circuit-breaker
Opening coil
4. Select “open CB” from the Ekip Touch menu
with Ekip Com
Actuator Result: The circuit-breaker opens correctly; the signals are normal.
NOTE! The test can be performed if the release and the coils
are energized.
(*)
if present.
(**) only withdrawable versions.
Accessories (*)
to be
Procedure
checked
1. Power the protection release with the Vaux auxiliary power
supply.
2. Power the Ekip Com Actuator contacts.
3. Load the springs.
Closing coil with Ekip 4. Select “close CB” from the Ekip Touch menu
Com Actuator Result: The circuit-breaker closes correctly; the signals are
normal.
NOTE! The test can be performed if the protection

release and the coils are energized.
1. Open the circuit-breaker
Lock for circuit-breaker 2. Keep the opening push-button pressed
in open position (key or 3. Turn the key and remove it
padlock) 4. Attempt the circuit-breaker closing operation.
Result: Both manual and electrical closing are prevented.
1. Connect the auxiliary contacts to appropriate signalling
circuits or to the multimeter.
Auxiliary contacts of the 2. perform some closing and opening operations on the
circuit-breaker circuit-breaker.
Result: signalling occurs normally.
1. Connect the auxiliary contacts to appropriate signalling
Circuit-breaker circuits.
connected, isolated 2. next bring the circuit-breaker to the connected, isolated for
for test, disconnected test and disconnected position.
auxiliary contacts
Result: the signals due to the relative operations are normal.
Interlocking devices of the 1. Perform operating tests.
circuit-breaker connected
and extracted (**) Result: the locks function correctly.
Interlock devices 1. Perform operating tests.
between circuit breakers
assembled side by side Result: the locks function correctly.
and stacked
1. Perform a few racking-in and racking-out operations.
Device insertion and Result: in the rack-in operation the circuit-breaker is
extraction (**) connected correctly. There is no particular resistance during
the first turns of the handle.
Verify the installation The value of the power supply auxiliary
Auxiliary accessories and
voltage of the auxiliary accessories must be between 85% and
auxiliary voltage
110% of the rated voltage for the auxiliary accessories.
1. Power the protection release
Result: Verify that Power LED is lit up on each accessory
Modules present.
Make sure that the Local Bus communication line is activated
on the protection release.
1. In the case of Neutral external sensors, single-pole or
differential, to set the model and protection parameters
appropriately.
External connections Result: No alarm present on the protection release.
WARNING! During this phase the circuit-breaker

must be open and withdrawn (if withdrawable).
(*)
if present.
(**) only withdrawable versions.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Final check list After completing the procedures for general checks and checks on the accessories, perform
the following operations. Print this sheet in order to annotate in the column Check the check
that was carried out.
Operation Description Check

1 Circuit-breaker OFF Open the circuit-breaker
Switch the circuit-breaker in withdrawable
2 Circuit-breaker connected version to the connected position and
reposition the crank in its seat
Adjust the protection release in accordance
with the design specifications of the
3 Release Parameters installation (drawn up by design engineer
of the installation). If necessary, power the
protection release with an Ekip TT unit
4 Removal of the Ekip TT If present, remove the Ekip TT unit
5 Connecting the voltage Connect the auxiliary voltage
6 Closing the switchgear Close the switchgear door
7 Loading the springs Load the closing springs
Make sure that under-voltage coil is
8 Under-voltage coil
energized
Make sure that opening and closing coils
9 Opening and closing coils
are NOT energized
Mechanical interlock of the If present, make sure that mechanical
10
circuit-breaker interlock of the circuit-breaker is not active
If present, make sure that interlocking
11 Interlocking devices
devices of the circuit-breaker are not active
Check that the signalling devices on the
front of the circuit-breaker represent:
12 Status signals circuit-breaker open - springs unloaded
O - OPEN and springs signaller white
DISCHARGED SPRING
ABB | SACE Emax 2
2 - Identification of alarms or failures
Introduction The protection release is able to identify some faults and to signal them through LEDs or the
display; you need to identify the cause and eliminate it before re-closing the circuit-breaker,
both locally and remotely.
WARNING! identification of the faults must be managed only by Expert Persons

in the electrical area (IEV 195-04-01: Person with sufficient training and
experience to allow him/her to perceive the risks and to avoid the hazards
potentially created by electricity). Indeed, it may be necessary to perform
insulation and dielectric tests on part or all of the installation.
Some failures involve partial operation of the circuit-breaker. Consult the paragraphs “Faults,
causes and remedies” on page 247 and “Faults signalled on the display” on page 250 where
the possible causes of the main faults are listed.
246 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Putting into service and maintenance | 2 - Identification of alarms or failures
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Faults, causes and remedies The following is a list of possible fault situations, their possible causes and suggestions for
resolving them.
NOTE: Before consulting the table, check the error messages on the display. If the
suggestions indicated fail to resolve the problem, contact the ABB Assistance Service
supplying, if possible supplying the report produced by the Ekip Connect software.
Faults Possible causes Suggestions

Press the push-button of the
The trip signal of the protection
mechanical reset or operate the
release has not been reset
electrical reset remotely.
The open position key lock is Unlock the lock in open position
activated using the relevant key
The circuit-breaker is in an
The circuit-breaker Complete the connection
intermediate position between
doesn't close when operation
connected and test
the closing push-
button is pressed The under-voltage coil is not Check the power supply circuit
energized and the power supply voltage
The opening coil is permanently
Correct condition of operation.
energized
Rotate the crank to complete
The release pushbutton is
or the plug-in or unplugging
pressed (withdrawable version)
operation initiated
Press the reset push-button
Measure the voltage: it should
The power supply voltage of the
not be lower than 85% of the
auxiliary circuits is too low
rated voltage of the coil
The power supply voltage is
Check the voltage on the rating
different to that indicated on the
plate
rating plate
Make sure there is continuity
The cables of the coil are between cable and terminal
not inserted correctly in the and if necessary reconnect
terminals the cables of the coil to the
terminals
The connections in the power Check the connections using the
The circuit-breaker supply circuit are wrong relevant wiring diagram
doesn't close when The closing coil is damaged Replace the coil
the closing coil is
powered Perform the closing operation
The operating mechanism is
manually; if the fault persists
locked
contact ABB
The open position key lock is Unlock the lock in open position
activated using the relevant key
The circuit-breaker is in an
Complete the connection
intermediate position between
operation
connected and test
The under-voltage coil is not Make sure that under-voltage
energized coil is energized properly
The opening coil is permanently
If necessary, disconnect the
energized
power from the opening coil
The racking out crank handle is
Remove the crank
inserted (withdrawable version)
The circuit-breaker
doesn't open when The operating mechanism is
Contact ABB
the opening push- locked
button is pressed

Contact ABB
locked
Measure the voltage: it should
The power supply voltage of the
not be lower than 85% of the
auxiliary circuits is too low
rated voltage of the coil
The power supply voltage is
The circuit-breaker different to that indicated on the Use the correct voltage
doesn't open when rating plate
the opening coil is Make sure there is continuity
powered The cables of the coil are between cable and terminal
not inserted correctly in the and if necessary reconnect
terminals the cables of the coil to the
terminals
The connections of the power Check the connections using the
supply circuit are wrong relevant wiring diagram
The opening coil is damaged Replace the coil
The circuit-breaker
Perform the opening operation
doesn't open when The operating mechanism is
manually; if the fault persists
the under-voltage coil locked
contact ABB
trips
It is not possible
to load the closing
springs by means of Contact ABB
locked
the manual loading
lever
Make sure there is continuity
The cables of the gearmotor between cable and terminal
are not inserted correctly in the and if necessary reconnect the
terminals cables of the gearmotor to the
terminals
It is not possible
to load the closing The connections of the power Check the connections using
springs by means of supply circuit are wrong the relevant wiring diagram
the gearmotor The circuit-breaker is in Switch the circuit-breaker to the
disconnected position test or connected position
The gearmotor protection
Replace the fuse
internal fuse has tripped
The gearmotor is damaged Replace the gearmotor
It is not possible to
Press the opening push-button
press the button in
in order to allow the insertion
order to insert the The circuit-breaker is closed
of the crank with the circuit-
racking out crank
breaker open
handle
See the chapter “Description
The racking-in/racking-out
- circuit-breaker insertion and
operation is not performed
It is not possible to extraction operations” on page
correctly
insert the moving 18
part in the fixed part Check the compatibility
The moving part is incompatible
between the moving part and
with the fixed part
the fixed part
It is not possible The opening push-button is not Press the opening push-button
to lock the circuit- being pressed and activate the lock
breaker in the open The lock in open position is
position Contact ABB
defective
Check the connection of the
The opening solenoid is not
opening solenoid and check the
inserted correctly
messages on the display
It is not possible to
perform the Trip Test Press the reset push-button
The busbar current is greater
than 0

Selected threshold too low Correct the threshold
Wrong curve selected Correct the curve
Tripping times shorter
Thermal memory enabled Disable it if it is not necessary
than expected
Incorrect Neutral selection Correct the neutral selection
Zone selectivity enabled Disable it if it is not necessary
Threshold too high Correct the threshold
Tripping times longer Curve too high Correct the curve
than expected Wrong curve selected Correct the curve type
Incorrect Neutral selection Correct the neutral selection
Correct operating condition
Rapid trip with I3=Off linst trip with short circuit at high
current
Incorrect selection of the
High earth current, but Set internal or external sensor
sensor
no trip occurs
Function G inhibited with I>4In Correct condition of operation.
Vaux lacks current and/or the
voltage is less than minimum Correct condition of operation.
Display off value
Temperature outside range Correct condition of operation.
Current and/or voltages below
The display is not backlit Correct condition of operation.
the display switch-on limit
Current below the minimum
Incorrect current reading threshold that can be Correct condition of operation.
displayed
Check the connections
Incorrect connection between
between the voltage
external voltage transformer
Incorrect voltage, power and Ekip Measuring transformer and Ekip
and cos φ reading Measuring
Voltage parameter setting
Set the correct parameters
error
The expected trip does Correct condition of operation.
Trip function disabled
not occur Enable trip if necessary
No activation of the
Values outside range Correct condition of operation.
Unbalance protection U
Opening data not
Vaux absent and/or battery low Correct condition of operation.
displayed
Corrected condition of
The password is not The password was disabled or
operation, reset the password
requested already inserted recently
with a value other than “0000”
Impossible to change
Release in alarm condition Correct condition of operation.
any of the parameters
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Faults signalled on the display The following is a list of faults that can be detected from the display and the suggestions for
resolving them:
Signal Suggestions
Local bus enabled bus but no module present: check
No Com on Local bus
connection to terminal box modules (e.g.: supply, com, contact,
warning
etc.)
Trip Coil disconnected Check the connection of the opening solenoid
Contact Wear PreAlarm/
Make sure that the contacts/poles are in good condition.
Alarm
L1/L2/L3/Ne sensor
Check the connection of the current sensor
disconnected
Gext sensor
Check the connection of the current sensor
Disconnected
Check the Rating Plug connection on the front of the protection
Rating Plug Error
release.
Internal Error Contact ABB
Invalid Date Set the date
CB Status Error Check the circuit-breaker status signal contacts
Rating Plug Installation Install Rating Plug, and in the case of faults check its
Warning connection
Switchboard Actors Check the configuration and connection of the Ekip COM Link
Communication Error modules
Battery Low Change the battery on the release (*)
Voltage module
Install the module
Installation warning
Voltage Module Error Error reading the module parameters. Contact ABB
(*)
Further information is available from the web site http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, whe-
re the procedure is available 1SDH001000R0509.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
3 - Maintenance
Safety standards The following are the warnings to be respected during the maintenance operations
HAZARD! RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! Risk of electric shock or accident.
WARNING! before proceeding with any maintenance operation, it is obligatory

to:
• Open the circuit-breaker and make sure that the springs of the operating mechanism
are unloaded.
• In the case of a withdrawable circuit-breaker, extract the circuit-breaker from the
fixed part (see the indication DISCONNECTED)
• If work must be performed on fixed circuit-breakers or on fixed parts, disconnect
the power supply to the power circuit and auxiliary circuits and visibly earth the
terminals on both the supply side and load side.
• Set the equipment to safe conditions as established by the standards and laws
in force.
Expert personnel The maintenance operations must be carried out by Expert Personnel:
an expert person in the electrical area (IEV 195-04-01: Person with sufficient training and
experience to allow him/her to perceive the risks and to avoid the hazards potentially created
by electricity.
ABB declines all liability for damage to persons or property caused by failure to comply with
the instructions in this document.
251 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Putting into service and maintenance | 3 - Maintenance
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Circuit-breaker life Emax 2 circuit-breakers, with or without opening or closing releases, can withstand the
following operating cycles if regularly serviced(1).
Interrupted Electrical life

Mechanical life with
rated
regular maintenance 440V AC 690V AC
current Frequency
Circuit-
breaker Frequency of
No. No. No.
Iu (40°C) of Operations/
operations operations operations
[A] Operations/ hour
(x 1000) (x 1000) (x 1000)
hour
< 1600 25 60 15 15 30
1600 25 60 12 10 30
E2.2
2000 25 60 10 8 30
2500 20 60 8 7 30
< 2500 20 60 10 10 20
2500 20 60 8 8 20
E4.2 3200 20 60 7 7 20
4000 15 60 5 4 20
3200 15 60 2 2 20
4000 12 60 4 4 10
E6.2 5000 12 60 3 2 10
6300 12 60 2 2 10
(1)
See chapter 5 - Environmental conditions on page 22 .
Maintenance schedule Proper maintenance of the equipment allows good electromechanical operation to be
maintained over time.
The maintenance plan for SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers specifies two periodic levels of
maintenance for the different types of site conditions.
The following is a table of maintenance frequency with the periodic intervals and the routine
maintenance operations.
Frequency of maintenance
Frequency of maintenance
in dusty environments
Type of maintenance in standard environments
(1) (dust level measured >
1mg/m3)
One year or 20% of 6 months or 10% of
First Level mechanical life or 20% of mechanical life or 10% of
electrical life electrical life
Three years or 50% of 18 months or 25% of
mechanical life or 50% of mechanical life or 25% of
Second Level
electrical life or after a trip electrical life or after a trip
under short-circuit under short-circuit
(1)
See chapter 5 - Environmental conditions on page 22 .
Compliance with the following rules is also recommended:

• Even circuit-breakers that are operated infrequently or that remain closed or open for long
periods of time must be subjected to programmed maintenance.
• All the circuit-breakers provide information on the number of operations carried out. With
Ekip Dip releases, the information can be obtained with the aid of Ekip T&P and a PC on
which the Ekip Connect software is installed. With Ekip Touch releases, the information is
available at any time on the appropriate display. With Ekip Dip releases, installation of the
mechanical operation counter is recommended (supplied on request).
• During the service, visually inspect the circuit-breaker from the outside to check for the
presence of dust, dirt or damage.
252 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Putting into service and maintenance | 3 - Maintenance
ABB | SACE Emax 2
4 - First level maintenance
First level maintenance should be carried out in accordance with the maintenance schedule
shown on page 252.
Preliminary operations The following are the operations to be carried out:
1. Open the circuit-breaker and make sure that the springs of the operating mechanism
are unloaded.
2. In the case of a withdrawable circuit-breaker, extract the circuit-breaker from the fixed
part (see the indication DISCONNECT)
WARNING! if work must be performed on fixed circuit-breakers or on fixed

parts, disconnect the power supply to the power circuit and auxiliary circuits
and visibly earth the terminals on both the supply side and load side.
Inspections and general Perform the following checks:

cleaning
1. Check the cleanliness of the circuit-breaker, removing any dust or oily traces or excess
grease using a clean, dry rag (possibly using mild detergent. Use a cleaning product
such as Henkel 273471 or equivalent if there is a heavy coating of dirt).
2. Check that the rating plates with the technical specifications of the apparatus are present.
3. Clean the rating plates with clean, dry rags.
4. Make sure that there are no foreign bodies in the circuit-breaker compartment.
Circuit-breaker connections and Perform the following checks on the connections:

connections between circuit-
breaker and switchboard 1. With dry paint-brushes and rags remove dust or soil, if present (use a non- aggressive
detergent if necessary. Use a cleaning product such as Henkel 273471 or equivalent if
there is a heavy coating of dirt).
2. Make sure there there are no traces of overheating on the terminals. Overheating is
detected by a different coloration of the parts in contact; the contact parts are usually
silvery white in colour.
3. Check the tightness of fastening bolts for all connections to the terminals

253 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Putting into service and maintenance | 4 - First level maintenance
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Disassembly operations To disassemble the parts of the circuit-breaker:
1. Remove the transparent flange (A) of the release, by turning the screws (B).
2. Remove the escutcheon plate of the circuit-breaker (C), by removing the mounting
screws (D).
1
2
C 2
1
90°
A
B
D
3. Remove the gearmotor (E) by removing the screw (F).
E
E
Figure 92 - Removing the gearmotor
4. If there is a minimum voltage coil (G), remove it, and discharge the springs of the
operating mechanism for closing and opening the circuit breaker.
Figure 93 - Removing the undervoltage coil
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Cleaning and lubrication of the To clean and lubricate:

operating mechanism
1. Clean the closing shaft and closing hook at the point indicated. In the case of excessive
deposits you can use a laminate thinner such as Henkel 273471 or equivalent.
2. Lubricate, in the points indicated, the closing shaft and closing hook with grease
Mobilgrease 28 (EXXON MOBIL).
3. Make sure that the closing shaft is free to rotate.
Figure 94 - Lubricating the shaft and closing hook
Inspection of electrical and Check the accessories:

mechanical accessories
1. Check that the accessories are securely fixed to the circuit-breaker.
2. Check that the accessories are connected correctly to the circuit-breaker.
3. Make sure that the coils (YU-YO-YC) are in good condition (no excessive wear and tear,
overheating, rupture).
4. Make sure that the mechanical operation counter functions correctly (if present) by
operating the circuit-breaker.
5. Check the wear on the brushes of the gearmotor and if necessary replace them.
NOTE: you are recommended to change the gearmotor if it has performed more than
10000 spring loading operations.
Inspection of the protection Check that the release is in good condition:

release
1. Power the protection release with an Ekip TT battery unit.
2. Check the correct operation of the protection release: tripping test with "Trip Test" and
"Self-test".
3. With an Ekip Dip release, verify the absence of alarms via the front LEDs.
4. With an Ekip Touch release, verify the absence of alarms via the display and the front
LEDs.
5. Make sure that the cables are correctly connected to the release modules and to the
release itself (if applicable).
6. On an Ekip Touch release check the percentage of wear on the contacts of the circuit-
breaker.
7. Finally, remove the Ekip TT battery unit.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Test with Ekip Connect Test the release:
1. Connect the Ekip Bluetooth or Ekip T & P unit to the release.

2. Connect the computer where the program is installed by means of a Bluetooth or USB
connection.
3. After connecting the computer and release, check that there are no alarm signals by the
release. Otherwise, refer to the paragraph " 2 - Identification of alarms or failures" on
page 246.
4. In the absence of alarms you can proceed to the trip test and self test (depending on the
type of release). For future checks it is recommended to insert the current date in the
area called "Information". These data will be stored within the release itself.
5. Remove the Ekip Bluetooth or Ekip T & P unit from the release.
Final checks Reassemble and check the circuit-breaker:
1. Reassemble all the parts by performing all the operations indicated in the paragraph
“Disassembly Operations” in reverse order and, if necessary, reconnect the auxiliary
power supply.
2. Put the movable part (breakers) in the test position (see indication TEST).
3. Using the various auxiliaries perform the following operations 10 times:
• Opening (in both local and remote modes, if applicable)
• Closing (in both local and remote modes, if applicable)
• Tripping via Trip Test from the protection release.
4. Perform the operations in the following sequence:
• Open - Springs unloaded
• Open - Springs loaded
• Closed - Springs unloaded
• Closed - Springs loaded
5. Check that the following operate correctly:
• accessories, if provided.
• gearmotor, if provided.
• undervoltage release, if provided.
• opening release, if provided.
• closing release, if provided.
• auxiliary contacts of the circuit-breaker, if provided.
• lock for circuit-breaker in open position (key or padlock), if provided
Interlock check Check that the vertical or horizontal interlocking devices (if provided) are installed and that they
operate correctly.
WARNING! the interlocks cannot be tested in the Test or Disconnected

positions.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
5 - Second level maintenance
The second level of maintenance must be performed in accordance with the maintenance
schedule shown on page 252.
Preliminary operations The following are the operations to be carried out:
1. Open the circuit-breaker and make sure that the springs of the operating mechanism
are unloaded.
2. In the case of a withdrawable circuit-breaker work with it withdrawn from the fixed part.
For removal of the fixed part see paragraph "Circuit breaker racking-in/racking-out
operations" on page 18 .
Figure 95 - Remove the moving part from the fixed part.

Inspections and general Perform the following checks:

cleaning
1. Check the cleanliness of the circuit-breaker, removing any dust or oily traces or excess
grease using a clean, dry rag (possibly using mild detergent. Use a cleaning product
such as Henkel 273471 or equivalent if there is a heavy coating of dirt).
2. Check that the rating plates with the technical specifications of the apparatus are present.
3. Clean the rating plates with clean, dry rags.
4. If the circuit-breaker is the withdrawable version, remove all traces of dust, mould,
condensation and oxidation inside the fixed part.
5. Make sure that there are no traces of overheating or cracks, which could impair the
insulating parts of the circuit-breaker
6. Check the integrity of the separation pliers (for withdrawable circuit-breaker).
7. The jaw contacts must be silvery in colour with no traces of erosion or discoloration.
8. Make sure that there are no foreign bodies in the circuit-breaker compartment.
9. Make sure that the screws that fasten the fixed part to the switchgear are well tightened
(M8 - 25Nm)
257 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Putting into service and maintenance | 5 - Second level maintenance
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Circuit-breaker connections and Perform the following checks on the connections:

connections between circuit-
breaker and switchboard 1. With dry paint-brushes and rags remove dust or soil, if present (use a non- aggressive
detergent if necessary. Use a cleaning product such as Henkel 273471 or equivalent if
there is a heavy coating of dirt).
2. Make sure there there are no traces of overheating on the terminals. Overheating is
detected by a different coloration of the parts in contact; the contact parts are usually
silvery white in colour.
3. Make sure that the bolts of the terminal connections are well tightened.

ABB | SACE Emax 2
Disassembly operations To disassemble the parts of the circuit-breaker:
1. Remove the transparent flange (A) of the release, by turning the screws (B).
2. Remove the escutcheon plate of the circuit-breaker (C), by removing the mounting
screws (D).
C
11
2
2
1
90°
3. Remove one or both of the side guards (I) (if installed) by removing the front screws (L).
4. Remove the gearmotor (E) by removing the screw (F).
E
E
Figure 97 - Removing the flange Figure 98 - Removing the gearmotor
1. If there is a minimum voltage coil (G), remove it, and discharge the springs of the operating
mechanism for closing and opening the circuit breaker.
Figure 99 - Removing the undervoltage coil
5. Remove the escutcheon plate of the circuit-breaker (e) by removing the screws (f) and
the protection plate (g) by removing the screw (h).
E
Figure 100 - Removing the escutcheon plate
H
Figure 101 - Removing the protection plate
Before cleaning and lubrication of the operating mechanism, you must remove the protection
release. For information about removal, see the document 1SDH001000R0523, or request the
intervention of a technician ABB.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Cleaning and lubrication of the To clean and lubricate:

operating mechanism
1. Clean the closing hook, the closing shaft, opening hook and opening shaft in the points
indicated by the illustrations. In the case of excessive deposits you can use a thinner
laminate of the type Henkel 273471 or equivalent.
2. Lubricate closing hook, the closing shaft, opening hook and opening shaft in the points
indicated by the illustrations with Mobilgrease 28 grease (EXXON MOBIL).
3. Make sure that the opening and closing shafts are free to turn.
Figure 102 - Lubricating the shaft and closing hook
Figure 103 - Lubricating the closing hook
Figure 104 - Lubricating the shaft and opening hook
Figure 105 - Lubricating the opening hook
• In the case of deformed or rusty springs, rings missing or severe wear of the operating
device, contact ABB Sace.
Inspection of electrical and Check the accessories:

mechanical accessories
1. Check that the accessories are securely fixed to the circuit-breaker.
2. Check that the accessories are connected correctly to the circuit-breaker.
3. Make sure that the releases (YU-YO-YC) are in good conditions (absence of excessive
wear, overheating, breakages).
4. Make sure that the mechanical operation counter functions correctly (if present) by
operating the circuit-breaker.
5. Check the wear on the brushes of the gearmotor and if necessary replace them.
NOTE: You are recommended to change the gearmotor if it has performed more than
10000 spring loading operations.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Check for wear on the contacts With the circuit-breaker open and springs discharged:
1. Remove the arc chutes

3
1
Figure 106 - Removing the arc chutes
2. Check the condition of the arc-breaking chutes: the base of the chute must be
undamaged and the plates must be neither corroded nor indented.
3. Remove the dust with compressed air, then clean off all traces of fumes and slag with
a brush.
4. Make sure that the contacts are in good condition.
5. Visually check to make sure that the main and arc-breaking plates are in place.
6. Check for tarnishing or beading. If such defects are discovered, ask for assistance from
a qualified ABB Technician (*).
7. Check the arc-breaking gaps (distance A).
A
E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2 > 1,5 mm ->OK
Figure 107 - Checking the breaking gaps
8. Close the circuit-breaker and check dimension A. Contact ABB Sace (*) if dimension A
is incorrect. If dimension A is correct, open the circuit-breaker again and re-assemble
the arc chutes.
NOTE: (*) After approval from the customer, ABB can proceed with replacement of
the worn parts.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
Inspection of the protection Check that the release is in good condition:

release
1. Power the protection release with an Ekip TT battery unit.
2. Check the correct operation of the protection release: tripping test with "Trip Test" and
"Self-test".
3. With an Ekip Dip release, verify the absence of alarms via the front LEDs.
4. With an Ekip Touch release, verify the absence of alarms via the display and the front
LEDs.
5. Make sure that the cables are correctly connected to the release modules and to the
release itself (if applicable).
6. On an Ekip Touch release check the percentage of wear on the contacts of the circuit-
breaker.
7. Finally, remove the Ekip TT battery unit.
Test with Ekip Connect Test the release:
1. Connect the Ekip Bluetooth or Ekip T & P unit to the release.

2. Connect the computer where the program is installed by means of a Bluetooth or USB
connection.
3. After connecting the computer and release, check that there are no alarm signals by the
release. Otherwise, refer to the paragraph " 2 - Identification of alarms or failures" on
page 246.
4. In the absence of alarms you can proceed to the trip test and self test (depending on the
type of release). For future checks it is recommended to insert the current date in the
area called "Information". These data will be stored within the release itself.
5. Remove the Ekip Bluetooth or Ekip T & P unit from the release.
Final checks Reassemble and check the circuit-breaker:
1. Reassemble all the parts by performing all the operations indicated in the paragraph
“Disassembly Operations” in reverse order and, if necessary, reconnect the auxiliary
power supply.
2. Put the movable part (breakers) in the test position (see indication TEST).
3. Using the various auxiliaries perform the following operations 10 times:
• Opening (in both local and remote modes, if applicable)
• Closing (in both local and remote modes, if applicable)
• Tripping via Trip Test from the protection release.
4. Perform the operations in the following sequence:
• Open - Springs unloaded
• Open - Springs loaded
• Closed - Springs unloaded
• Closed - Springs loaded
5. Check that the following operate correctly:
• accessories, if provided.
• gearmotor, if provided.
• undervoltage release, if provided.
• opening release, if provided.
• closing release, if provided.
• auxiliary contacts of the circuit-breaker, if provided.
• lock for circuit-breaker in open position (key or padlock), if provided
Interlock check Check that the vertical or horizontal interlocking devices (if provided) are installed and that they
operate correctly.
WARNING! the interlocks cannot be tested in the Test or Disconnected

positions.
ABB | SACE Emax 2
6 - Decommissioning and treatment at end of life
Safety standards During the early stages of the process of decommissioning and end of life treatment of Emax
2 circuit-breakers, observe the following safety rules:
• the closing springs, even if unloaded, must never to be taken apart
• for handling and lifting of the circuit-breakers refer to the section "Unpacking and handling"
on page 10 .
HAZARD! RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK! Unplug or disconnect any power supply,

to avoid any potential risk of shock during removal of the circuit-breaker from
the service.
WARNING! After dismantling the switchgear, the circuit-breaker must be

stored in the open position with the closing springs unloaded and with the
front escutcheon plate mounted.
Qualified personnel The operations for decommissioning Emax 2 circuit-breakers involve performing procedures
that can be performed by Trained Persons, in the electrical area (IEV 195-04-02): person
adequately informed or supervised by electrotechnical personnel to allow them to perceive the
risks and to avoid the hazards potentially created by electricity.
End of life treatment for circuit- The materials used in the production of Emax 2 circuit-breakers are recyclable and should be
breaker materials treated separately as shown in the following table:
TYPE MATERIAL
A Plastic parts (1)
B Metal parts
C Printed circuits
D Current sensors, cables, motors, electrical windings
(1)
All the components of significant dimensions bear a mark specifying the type of material.
NOTE: refer to the national legislation in force at the time of decommissioning of the
product, in the case where it specifies end of life treatment procedures different to
those indicated.
Disposal of packing materials The materials used for the packaging of Emax 2 circuit-breakers are recyclable and should be
treated separately as shown in the following table:
TYPE MATERIAL
A Plastic parts
B Cardboard parts
C Wooden parts
D Metal parts
NOTE: refer to the national legislation in force at the time of decommissioning of the
product, in the case where it specifies end of life treatment procedures different to
those indicated.
265 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Putting into service and maintenance | 6 - Decommissioning and treatment at end of life
ABB | SACE Emax 2
266 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Putting into service and maintenance | 6 - Decommissioning and treatment at end of life
1SDH001000R0002 - L7804

ABB SACE Emax 2 Series Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB SACE Emax 2 Series Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB SACE Emax 2 Series Installation, Operation and Maintenance Instructions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOC.

Emax low voltage air circuit-breakers E2.2-E4.2-E6.2

Installation, operation and maintenance

2 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 ﻿ | ﻿﻿

1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 © 2013 ABB SACE Emax 2 | I

II | © 2013 ABB SACE Emax 2 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804

1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 © 2013 ABB SACE Emax 2 | III

Putting into service and maintenance............................ 242

IV | © 2013 ABB SACE Emax 2 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804

3 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 ﻿ | ﻿﻿

Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers

Reception Installation Commissioning Maintenance Disposal

WARNING! Some operations must be performed when the circuit-breaker is

4 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 1 - Contents

Do not try to use the product in any way, before

The following warnings must be respected:

• detailed descriptions of standard procedures for installation, use, maintenance and

5 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 1 - Contents

They comply with the following EC directives:

6 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 1 - Contents

2 - Transport and checking on receipt

The following notes regard transport, handling and storage.

• weights are indicated with reference to the basic circuit-breakers including

SACE EMAX E2.2 N 1600

FIXED YO 24V AC-DC

REAR HORIZONTAL TERMINALS

Designed by ABB SACE Division

• If the material is to be stored, check it beforehand. For opening the

NOTE: The notification must indicate the Packing List number.

WARNING! overlay up to three packages with circuit-breakers E2.2 and E4.2

3 - Unpacking and handling

Opening the packaging

The following is the procedure for opening the packaging:

Continued on the next page

Figure 13 Moving part of withdra- Figure 14 Fixed part of withdrawa-

Lift the fixed circuit breaker

To lift the circuit-breaker:

To raise the fixed part of the circuit-breaker

13 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 4 - Description

14 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 4 - Description

3. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open/closed signalling device “O - OPEN”),

Continued on the next page

15 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 4 - Description

16 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 4 - Description

1. Circuit-breaker open with springs discharged (see Figure 29).

Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31

17 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 4 - Description

Continued on the next page

18 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 4 - Description

Continued on the next page

19 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 4 - Description

11. Extract the crank. See Figure 44.

20 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 4 - Description

Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48

21 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 4 - Description

It was tested according to:

NOTE: the circuit-breaker is suitable for installation in environments with saline

22 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers | 5 - Environmental conditions

Altitude (m.) 2000 3000 4000 5000

2 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 |

3 | © 2013 ABB | 1SDH001000R0002 - L7804 |